updated for version 7.3.034

Problem:    Win32: may be loading .dll from the wrong directory.
Solution:   Go to the Vim executable directory when opening a library.

.gitignore

@@ -2,6 +2,8 @@
 *.o
 src/vim
 src/xxd/xxd
+src/auto/if_perl.c
+src/tags
 
 # We do need src/auto/configure and src/auto/config.mk.
 src/auto/osdef.h
@@ -36,4 +38,5 @@ gvimext.lib
 *.rej
 *.orig
 *.mo
+*.swp
 *~

Contents

@@ -9,10 +9,10 @@ Vim		Vi IMproved.  A clone of the UNIX text editor Vi.  Very useful
 		messages, shows current file name in window title, on-line
 		help, rectangular cut/paste, etc., etc., etc...
 
-		Version 7.2.  Also runs under UNIX, MSDOS and other systems.
-		vim72rt.tgz  contains the documentation and syntax files.
-		vim72bin.tgz contains the binaries.
-		vim72src.tgz contains the sources.
+		Version 7.3.  Also runs under UNIX, MSDOS and other systems.
+		vim73rt.tgz  contains the documentation and syntax files.
+		vim73bin.tgz contains the binaries.
+		vim73src.tgz contains the sources.
 		Author: Bram Moolenaar et al.
 
 

Filelist

@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/arabic.c \
 		src/arabic.h \
 		src/ascii.h \
+		src/blowfish.c \
 		src/buffer.c \
 		src/charset.c \
 		src/diff.c \
@@ -58,6 +59,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/regexp.h \
 		src/screen.c \
 		src/search.c \
+		src/sha256.c \
 		src/structs.h \
 		src/spell.c \
 		src/syntax.c \
@@ -79,6 +81,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/test49.vim \
 		src/testdir/test60.vim \
 		src/proto.h \
+		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
 		src/proto/buffer.pro \
 		src/proto/charset.pro \
 		src/proto/diff.pro \
@@ -116,6 +119,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/regexp.pro \
 		src/proto/screen.pro \
 		src/proto/search.pro \
+		src/proto/sha256.pro \
 		src/proto/spell.pro \
 		src/proto/syntax.pro \
 		src/proto/tag.pro \
@@ -206,19 +210,24 @@ SRC_UNIX =	\
 SRC_DOS_UNIX =	\
 		src/if_cscope.c \
 		src/if_cscope.h \
+		src/if_lua.c \
 		src/if_mzsch.c \
 		src/if_mzsch.h \
 		src/if_perl.xs \
 		src/if_perlsfio.c \
 		src/if_python.c \
+		src/if_python3.c \
+		src/if_py_both.h \
 		src/if_ruby.c \
 		src/if_sniff.h \
 		src/if_tcl.c \
 		src/proto/if_cscope.pro \
+		src/proto/if_lua.pro \
 		src/proto/if_mzsch.pro \
 		src/proto/if_perl.pro \
 		src/proto/if_perlsfio.pro \
 		src/proto/if_python.pro \
+		src/proto/if_python3.pro \
 		src/proto/if_ruby.pro \
 		src/proto/if_tcl.pro \
 		src/typemap \
@@ -369,7 +378,7 @@ SRC_MAC =	\
 		src/os_mac.h \
 		src/os_mac.rsr.hqx \
 		src/os_mac_conv.c \
-		src/os_macosx.c \
+		src/os_macosx.m \
 		src/proto/gui_mac.pro \
 		src/proto/os_mac_conv.pro \
 
@@ -654,13 +663,12 @@ EXTRA =		\
 		farsi/fonts/*/far-* \
 		runtime/vimlogo.xpm \
 		src/swis.s \
-		src/tee/Makefile* \
+		src/tee/Makefile \
 		src/tee/tee.c \
 		csdpmi4b.zip \
 
 # generic language files
 LANG_GEN = \
-		README_lang.txt \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-it.1 \

Makefile

@@ -3,8 +3,10 @@
 # 2. Creating the various distribution files.
 
 
-# 1. Using this Makefile without an argument will compile Vim for Unix.
+#########################################################################
+# 1. Starting the compilation of Vim for Unix.
 #
+# Using this Makefile without an argument will compile Vim for Unix.
 # "make install" is also possible.
 #
 # NOTE: If this doesn't work properly, first change directory to "src" and use
@@ -33,20 +35,14 @@ all install uninstall tools config configure reconfig proto depend lint tags typ
 	cd src && $(MAKE) $@
 
 
-# 2. Create the various distributions:
+#########################################################################
+# 2. Creating the various distribution files.
 #
 # TARGET	PRODUCES		CONTAINS
-# unixall	vim-#.#.tar.bz2		Runtime files and Sources for Unix
-#
-# extra		vim-#.#-extra.tar.gz	Extra source and runtime files
-# lang		vim-#.#-lang.tar.gz	multi-language files
+# unixall	vim-#.#.tar.bz2		All runtime files and sources, for Unix
 #
 # html		vim##html.zip		HTML docs
 #
-# amisrc	vim##src.tgz		sources for Amiga
-# amirt		vim##rt.tgz		runtime for Amiga
-# amibin	vim##bin.tgz		binary for Amiga
-#
 # dossrc	vim##src.zip		sources for MS-DOS
 # dosrt		vim##rt.zip		runtime for MS-DOS
 # dosbin	vim##d16.zip		binary for MS-DOS 16 bits
@@ -55,7 +51,11 @@ all install uninstall tools config configure reconfig proto depend lint tags typ
 #		gvim##.zip		binary for GUI Win32
 #		gvim##ole.zip		OLE exe for Win32 GUI
 #		gvim##_s.zip		exe for Win32s GUI
-# doslang	vim##lang.zip		language files for Win32
+#
+# OBSOLETE
+# amisrc	vim##src.tgz		sources for Amiga
+# amirt		vim##rt.tgz		runtime for Amiga
+# amibin	vim##bin.tgz		binary for Amiga
 #
 # os2bin	vim##os2.zip		binary for OS/2
 #					(use RT from dosrt)
@@ -64,29 +64,35 @@ all install uninstall tools config configure reconfig proto depend lint tags typ
 #
 #    All output files are created in the "dist" directory.  Existing files are
 #    overwritten!
-#    To do all this you need the unix, extra and lang archives, and
-#    compiled binaries.
+#    To do all this you need the Unix archive and compiled binaries.
 #    Before creating an archive first delete all backup files, *.orig, etc.
 
 MAJOR = 7
-MINOR = 2
+MINOR = 3
 
 # Uncomment this line if the Win32s version is to be included.
 DOSBIN_S =  dosbin_s
 
+# Uncomment this line if the 16 bit DOS version is to be included.
+# DOSBIN_D16 = dosbin_d16
+
 # CHECKLIST for creating a new version:
 #
 # - Update Vim version number.  For a test version in: src/version.h, Contents,
 #   MAJOR/MINOR above, VIMMAJOR and VIMMINOR in src/Makefile, README*.txt,
 #   runtime/doc/*.txt and nsis/gvim.nsi. Other things in README_os2.txt.  For a
-#   minor/major version: src/GvimExt/GvimExt.reg, src/vim.def, src/vim16.def.
+#   minor/major version: src/GvimExt/GvimExt.reg, src/vim.def, src/vim16.def,
+#   src/gvim.exe.mnf.
+# - Adjust the date and other info in src/version.h.
 # - Correct included_patches[] in src/version.c.
-# - Compile Vim with GTK, Perl, Python, TCL, Ruby, MZscheme (if you can make it
-#   work), Cscope and "huge" features.  Exclude workshop and SNiFF.
+# - Compile Vim with GTK, Perl, Python, Python3, TCL, Ruby, MZscheme, Lua (if
+#   you can make it all work), Cscope and "huge" features.  Exclude workshop
+#   and SNiFF.
 # - With these features: "make proto" (requires cproto and Motif installed;
 #   ignore warnings for missing include files, fix problems for syntax errors).
 # - With these features: "make depend" (works best with gcc).
-# - "make lint" and check the output (ignore GTK warnings).
+# - If you have a lint program: "make lint" and check the output (ignore GTK
+#   warnings).
 # - Enable the efence library in "src/Makefile" and run "make test".  Disable
 #   Python and Ruby to avoid trouble with threads (efence is not threadsafe).
 # - Check for missing entries in runtime/makemenu.vim (with checkmenu script).
@@ -102,10 +108,10 @@ DOSBIN_S =  dosbin_s
 #   the "check" script).
 # - Check compiling on Amiga, MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
 # - Delete all *~, *.sw?, *.orig, *.rej files
-# - "make unixall", "make extra", "make lang", "make html"
+# - "make unixall", "make html"
 # - Make diff files against the previous release: "makediff7 7.1 7.2"
 #
-# Amiga:
+# Amiga: (OBSOLETE, Amiga files are no longer distributed)
 # - "make amisrc", move the archive to the Amiga and compile:
 #   "make -f Make_manx.mak" (will use "big" features by default).
 # - Run the tests: "make -f Make_manx.mak test"
@@ -114,8 +120,9 @@ DOSBIN_S =  dosbin_s
 # - "make amirt", "make amibin".
 #
 # PC:
+# - Run make on Unix to update the ".mo" files.
 # - "make dossrc" and "make dosrt".  Unpack the archives on a PC.
-# 16 bit DOS version:
+# 16 bit DOS version: (OBSOLETE, 16 bit version doesn't build)
 # - Set environment for compiling with Borland C++ 3.1.
 # - "bmake -f Make_bc3.mak BOR=E:\borlandc" (compiling xxd might fail, in that
 #   case set environment for compiling with Borland C++ 4.0 and do
@@ -131,9 +138,11 @@ DOSBIN_S =  dosbin_s
 # - Rename the executables to "vimd32.exe", "xxdd32.exe", "installd32.exe" and
 #   "uninstald32.exe".
 # Win32 console version:
-# - Set environment for Visual C++ 2008 Express Edition: "msvc2008.bat".  Or,
-#   when using the Visual C++ Toolkit 2003: "msvcsetup.bat" (adjust the paths
-#   when necessary).  For Windows 98 the 2003 version is required.
+# - Set environment for Visual C++ 2008, e.g.:
+#   "E:\Microsoft Visual Studio 9.0\VC\bin\vcvars32.bat".  Or, when using the
+#   Visual C++ Toolkit 2003: "msvcsetup.bat" (adjust the paths when necessary).
+#   For Windows 98/ME the 2003 version is required, but then it won't work on
+#   Windows 7 and 64 bit.
 # - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak"
 # - "rm testdir/*.out", "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak test" and check the output.
 # - Rename the executables to "vimw32.exe", "xxdw32.exe".
@@ -154,8 +163,8 @@ DOSBIN_S =  dosbin_s
 # - Delete install.exe and uninstal.exe.
 # - If building the Win32s version delete vimrun.exe.
 # Win32s GUI version:
-# - Set environment for Visual C++ 4.1 (requires a new console window)
-# - "vcvars32" (use the path for VC 4.1 e:\msdev\bin)
+# - Set environment for Visual C++ 4.1 (requires a new console window):
+#   "vcvars32.bat" (use the path for VC 4.1 e:\msdev\bin)
 # - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes INTL=no clean" (use the path for VC 4.1)
 # - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes INTL=no" (use the path for VC 4.1)
 # - Rename "gvim.exe" to "gvim_w32s.exe".
@@ -166,21 +175,23 @@ DOSBIN_S =  dosbin_s
 # - Copy all the "*.exe" files to where this Makefile is.
 # - Copy all the "*.pdb" files to where this Makefile is.
 # - "make dosbin".
-# - Run make on Unix to update the ".mo" files.
-# - "make doslang".
 # NSIS self installing exe:
-# - Unpack the doslang archive on the PC.
+# - To get NSIS see http://nsis.sourceforge.net
 # - Make sure gvim_ole.exe, vimd32.exe, vimw32.exe, installw32.exe,
 #   uninstalw32.exe and xxdw32.exe have been build as mentioned above.
-# - put gvimext.dll in src/GvimExt and VisVim.dll in src/VisVim (get them
-#   from a binary archive or build them)
+# - copy these files (get them from a binary archive or build them):
+#	gvimext.dll in src/GvimExt
+#	gvimext64.dll in src/GvimExt
+#	VisVim.dll in src/VisVim
 #   Note: VisVim needs to be build with MSVC 5, newer versions don't work.
+#   gvimext64.dll can be obtained from http://code.google.com/p/vim-win3264/
+#	It is part of vim72.zip as vim72/gvimext.dll.
 # - make sure there is a diff.exe two levels up
-# - go to ../nsis and do "makensis gvim.nsi".
+# - go to ../nsis and do "makensis gvim.nsi" (takes a few minutes).
 # - Copy gvim##.exe to the dist directory.
 #
-# OS/2:
-# - Unpack the Unix "src", "extra" and "rt" archives.
+# OS/2: (OBSOLETE, OS/2 version is no longer distributed)
+# - Unpack the Unix archive.
 # - "make -f Make_os2.mak".
 # - Rename the executables to vimos2.exe, xxdos2.exe and teeos2.exe and copy
 #   them to here.
@@ -215,8 +226,6 @@ dist/comment:
 	mkdir dist/comment
 
 COMMENT_RT = comment/$(VERSION)-rt
-COMMENT_RT1 = comment/$(VERSION)-rt1
-COMMENT_RT2 = comment/$(VERSION)-rt2
 COMMENT_D16 = comment/$(VERSION)-bin-d16
 COMMENT_D32 = comment/$(VERSION)-bin-d32
 COMMENT_W32 = comment/$(VERSION)-bin-w32
@@ -227,17 +236,10 @@ COMMENT_SRC = comment/$(VERSION)-src
 COMMENT_OS2 = comment/$(VERSION)-bin-os2
 COMMENT_HTML = comment/$(VERSION)-html
 COMMENT_FARSI = comment/$(VERSION)-farsi
-COMMENT_LANG = comment/$(VERSION)-lang
 
 dist/$(COMMENT_RT): dist/comment
 	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) runtime files for MS-DOS and MS-Windows" > dist/$(COMMENT_RT)
 
-dist/$(COMMENT_RT1): dist/comment
-	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) runtime files (PART 1) for MS-DOS and MS-Windows" > dist/$(COMMENT_RT1)
-
-dist/$(COMMENT_RT2): dist/comment
-	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) runtime files (PART 2) for MS-DOS and MS-Windows" > dist/$(COMMENT_RT2)
-
 dist/$(COMMENT_D16): dist/comment
 	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) binaries for MS-DOS 16 bit real mode" > dist/$(COMMENT_D16)
 
@@ -268,9 +270,6 @@ dist/$(COMMENT_HTML): dist/comment
 dist/$(COMMENT_FARSI): dist/comment
 	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) Farsi language files" > dist/$(COMMENT_FARSI)
 
-dist/$(COMMENT_LANG): dist/comment
-	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) MS-Windows language files" > dist/$(COMMENT_LANG)
-
 unixall: dist prepare
 	-rm -f dist/$(VIMVER).tar.bz2
 	-rm -rf dist/$(VIMRTDIR)
@@ -286,6 +285,8 @@ unixall: dist prepare
 		$(SRC_ALL) \
 		$(SRC_UNIX) \
 		$(SRC_DOS_UNIX) \
+		$(EXTRA) \
+		$(LANG_SRC) \
 		| (cd dist/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
 # Need to use a "distclean" config.mk file
 	cp -f src/config.mk.dist dist/$(VIMRTDIR)/src/auto/config.mk
@@ -293,26 +294,6 @@ unixall: dist prepare
 	touch dist/$(VIMRTDIR)/src/auto/config.h
 # Make sure configure is newer than config.mk to force it to be generated
 	touch dist/$(VIMRTDIR)/src/configure
-	cd dist && tar cf $(VIMVER).tar $(VIMRTDIR)
-	bzip2 dist/$(VIMVER).tar
-
-extra: dist prepare
-	-rm -f dist/$(VIMVER)-extra.tar.gz
-	-rm -rf dist/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	mkdir dist/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	tar cf - \
-		$(EXTRA) \
-		| (cd dist/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	cd dist && tar cf $(VIMVER)-extra.tar $(VIMRTDIR)
-	gzip -9 dist/$(VIMVER)-extra.tar
-
-lang: dist prepare
-	-rm -f dist/$(VIMVER)-lang.tar.gz
-	-rm -rf dist/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	mkdir dist/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	tar cf - \
-		$(LANG_SRC) \
-		| (cd dist/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
 # Make sure ja.sjis.po is newer than ja.po to avoid it being regenerated.
 # Same for cs.cp1250.po, pl.cp1250.po and sk.cp1250.po.
 	touch dist/$(VIMRTDIR)/src/po/ja.sjis.po
@@ -322,9 +303,11 @@ lang: dist prepare
 	touch dist/$(VIMRTDIR)/src/po/zh_CN.cp936.po
 	touch dist/$(VIMRTDIR)/src/po/ru.cp1251.po
 	touch dist/$(VIMRTDIR)/src/po/uk.cp1251.po
-	cd dist && tar cf $(VIMVER)-lang.tar $(VIMRTDIR)
-	gzip -9 dist/$(VIMVER)-lang.tar
+# Create the archive.
+	cd dist && tar cf $(VIMVER).tar $(VIMRTDIR)
+	bzip2 dist/$(VIMVER).tar
 
+# Amiga runtime - OBSOLETE
 amirt: dist prepare
 	-rm -f dist/vim$(VERSION)rt.tar.gz
 	-rm -rf dist/Vim
@@ -347,6 +330,7 @@ amirt: dist prepare
 	gzip -9 dist/vim$(VERSION)rt.tar
 	mv dist/vim$(VERSION)rt.tar.gz dist/vim$(VERSION)rt.tgz
 
+# Amiga binaries - OBSOLETE
 amibin: dist prepare
 	-rm -f dist/vim$(VERSION)bin.tar.gz
 	-rm -rf dist/Vim
@@ -364,6 +348,7 @@ amibin: dist prepare
 	gzip -9 dist/vim$(VERSION)bin.tar
 	mv dist/vim$(VERSION)bin.tar.gz dist/vim$(VERSION)bin.tgz
 
+# Amiga sources - OBSOLETE
 amisrc: dist prepare
 	-rm -f dist/vim$(VERSION)src.tar.gz
 	-rm -rf dist/Vim
@@ -384,15 +369,41 @@ amisrc: dist prepare
 no_title.vim: Makefile
 	echo "set notitle noicon nocp nomodeline viminfo=" >no_title.vim
 
+# MS-DOS sources
+dossrc: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_SRC) runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
+	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)src.zip
+	-rm -rf dist/vim
+	mkdir dist/vim
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
+	tar cf - \
+		$(SRC_ALL) \
+		$(SRC_DOS) \
+		$(SRC_AMI_DOS) \
+		$(SRC_DOS_UNIX) \
+		runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt \
+		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	mv dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime/* dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
+	rmdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime
+	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
+	tar cf - \
+		$(SRC_DOS_BIN) \
+		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
+	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z vim$(VERSION)src.zip vim <$(COMMENT_SRC)
+
+runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt: runtime/doc/uganda.txt
+	cd runtime/doc && $(MAKE) uganda.nsis.txt
+
 dosrt: dist dist/$(COMMENT_RT) dosrt_unix2dos
 	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)rt.zip
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z vim$(VERSION)rt.zip vim <$(COMMENT_RT)
 
-# Split in two parts to avoid a "argument list too long" error.
+# Split in two parts to avoid an "argument list too long" error.
 dosrt_unix2dos: dist prepare no_title.vim
 	-rm -rf dist/vim
 	mkdir dist/vim
 	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
+	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang
+	cd src && MAKEMO=yes $(MAKE) languages
 	tar cf - \
 		$(RT_ALL) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
@@ -412,6 +423,18 @@ dosrt_unix2dos: dist prepare no_title.vim
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
 	mv dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime/* dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
 	rmdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime
+# Add the message translations.  Trick: skip ja.mo and use ja.sjis.mo instead.
+# Same for cs.mo / cs.cp1250.mo, pl.mo / pl.cp1250.mo, sk.mo / sk.cp1250.mo,
+# zh_CN.mo / zh_CN.cp936.mo, uk.mo / uk.cp1251.mo and ru.mo / ru.cp1251.mo.
+	for i in $(LANG_DOS); do \
+	      if test "$$i" != "src/po/ja.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/pl.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/cs.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/sk.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/zh_CN.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/ru.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/uk.mo"; then \
+		n=`echo $$i | sed -e "s+src/po/\([-a-zA-Z0-9_]*\(.UTF-8\)*\)\(.sjis\)*\(.cp1250\)*\(.cp1251\)*\(.cp936\)*.mo+\1+"`; \
+		mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n; \
+		mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n/LC_MESSAGES; \
+		cp $$i dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n/LC_MESSAGES/vim.mo; \
+	      fi \
+	    done
+	cp libintl.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
 
 
 # Convert runtime files from Unix fileformat to dos fileformat.
@@ -421,7 +444,7 @@ runtime_unix2dos: dosrt_unix2dos
 	cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar cf - * \
 		| (cd ../../../runtime/dos; tar xf -)
 
-dosbin: prepare dosbin_gvim dosbin_w32 dosbin_d32 dosbin_d16 dosbin_ole $(DOSBIN_S)
+dosbin: prepare dosbin_gvim dosbin_w32 dosbin_d32 dosbin_ole $(DOSBIN_S) $(DOSBIN_D16)
 
 # make Win32 gvim
 dosbin_gvim: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_GVIM)
@@ -531,53 +554,6 @@ dosbin_s: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_W32S)
 	cp uninstalw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/uninstal.exe
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z gvim$(VERSION)_s.zip vim <$(COMMENT_W32S)
 
-# make Win32 lang archive
-doslang: dist prepare no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_LANG)
-	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)lang.zip
-	-rm -rf dist/vim
-	mkdir dist/vim
-	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang
-	cd src && MAKEMO=yes $(MAKE) languages
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
-# Add the message translations.  Trick: skip ja.mo and use ja.sjis.mo instead.
-# Same for cs.mo / cs.cp1250.mo, pl.mo / pl.cp1250.mo, sk.mo / sk.cp1250.mo,
-# zh_CN.mo / zh_CN.cp936.mo, uk.mo / uk.cp1251.mo and ru.mo / ru.cp1251.mo.
-	for i in $(LANG_DOS); do \
-	      if test "$$i" != "src/po/ja.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/pl.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/cs.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/sk.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/zh_CN.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/ru.mo" -a "$$i" != "src/po/uk.mo"; then \
-		n=`echo $$i | sed -e "s+src/po/\([-a-zA-Z0-9_]*\(.UTF-8\)*\)\(.sjis\)*\(.cp1250\)*\(.cp1251\)*\(.cp936\)*.mo+\1+"`; \
-		mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n; \
-		mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n/LC_MESSAGES; \
-		cp $$i dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n/LC_MESSAGES/vim.mo; \
-	      fi \
-	    done
-	cp libintl.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
-	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z vim$(VERSION)lang.zip vim <$(COMMENT_LANG)
-
-# MS-DOS sources
-dossrc: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_SRC) runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
-	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)src.zip
-	-rm -rf dist/vim
-	mkdir dist/vim
-	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	tar cf - \
-		$(SRC_ALL) \
-		$(SRC_DOS) \
-		$(SRC_AMI_DOS) \
-		$(SRC_DOS_UNIX) \
-		runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt \
-		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	mv dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime/* dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	rmdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
-	tar cf - \
-		$(SRC_DOS_BIN) \
-		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z vim$(VERSION)src.zip vim <$(COMMENT_SRC)
-
-runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt: runtime/doc/uganda.txt
-	cd runtime/doc && $(MAKE) uganda.nsis.txt
-
 os2bin: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_OS2)
 	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)os2.zip
 	-rm -rf dist/vim

README.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 
 WHAT IS VIM
@@ -9,13 +9,13 @@ on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations, etc.
 There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI) available.  See
 "runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt" for differences with Vi.
 
-This editor is very useful for editing programs and other plain ASCII files.
+This editor is very useful for editing programs and other plain text files.
 All commands are given with normal keyboard characters, so those who can type
 with ten fingers can work very fast.  Additionally, function keys can be
 defined by the user, and the mouse can be used.
 
-Vim currently runs under Amiga DOS, MS-DOS, MS-Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP,
-Atari MiNT, Macintosh, BeOS, VMS, RISC OS, OS/2 and almost all flavours of
+Vim runs under Amiga DOS, MS-DOS, MS-Windows (95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista,
+7), Atari MiNT, Macintosh, BeOS, VMS, RISC OS, OS/2 and almost all flavours of
 UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be very difficult.
 
 
@@ -32,19 +32,19 @@ an overview of currently available distributions.
 
 DOCUMENTATION
 
+The vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Mostly it can be
+started as "vimtutor".  See ":help tutor" for more information.
+
 The best is to use ":help" in Vim.  If you don't have an executable yet, read
 "runtime/doc/help.txt".  It contains pointers to the other documentation
 files.  The User Manual reads like a book and is recommended to learn to use
 Vim.  See ":help user-manual".
 
-The vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Mostly it can be
-started as "vimtutor".  See ":help tutor" for more information.
-
 
 COPYING
 
 Vim is Charityware.  You can use and copy it as much as you like, but you are
-encouraged to make a donation to orphans in Uganda.  Please read the file
+encouraged to make a donation to help orphans in Uganda.  Please read the file
 "runtime/doc/uganda.txt" for details (do ":help uganda" inside Vim).
 
 Summary of the license: There are no restrictions on using or distributing an
@@ -86,6 +86,8 @@ README_os2.txt		OS/2
 README_mac.txt		Macintosh
 README_vms.txt		VMS
 
+There are more README_*.txt files, depending on the distribution you used.
+
 
 INFORMATION
 
@@ -98,39 +100,12 @@ If you have problems, have a look at the Vim FAQ:
 Send bug reports to:
 	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
 
-There are five mailing lists for Vim:
-<vim@vim.org>
-	For discussions about using existing versions of Vim: Useful mappings,
-	questions, answers, where to get a specific version, etc.
-<vim-dev@vim.org>
-	For discussions about changing Vim: New features, porting, beta-test
-	versions, etc.
-<vim-announce@vim.org>
-	Announcements about new versions of Vim; also beta-test versions and
-	ports to different systems.
-<vim-multibyte@vim.org>
-	For discussions about using and improving the multi-byte aspects of
-	Vim: XIM, Hangul, fontset, etc.
-<vim-mac@vim.org>
-	For discussions about using and improving Vim on the Macintosh.
-
-For more info and URLs of the archives see "http://www.vim.org/maillist.php".
-
-NOTE:
-- You can only send messages to these lists if you have subscribed!
-- You need to send the messages from the same location as where you subscribed
-  from (to avoid spam mail).
-- Maximum message size is 40000 characters.
-
-If you want to join a maillist, send a message to
-	<vim-help@vim.org>
-Make sure that your "From:" address is correct.  Then the list server will
-send you a help message.
+There are several mailing lists for Vim, see http://www.vim.org/maillist.php.
 
 
 MAIN AUTHOR
 
-Send any other comments, patches, pizza and suggestions to:
+Send any other comments, patches, flowers and suggestions to:
 
 	Bram Moolenaar		E-mail:	Bram@vim.org
 	Finsterruetihof 1

README_ami.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_ami.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_ami.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on Amiga systems.
 See README.txt for general information about Vim.

README_amibin.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_amibin.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_amibin.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 See "README_ami.txt" for installation instructions for the Amiga.

README_amisrc.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_amisrc.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_amisrc.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 See "README_ami.txt" for installation instructions for the Amiga.

README_bindos.txt

@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
-README_bindos.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_bindos.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 See "README_dos.txt" for installation instructions for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
-These files are in the runtime archive (vim72rt.zip).
+These files are in the runtime archive (vim73rt.zip).
 
 
 There are several binary distributions of Vim for the PC.  You would normally
 pick only one of them, but it's also possible to install several.
 These ones are available (the version number may differ):
-	vim72d16.zip	16 bit DOS version
-	vim72d32.zip	32 bit DOS version
-	vim72w32.zip	Windows 95/98/NT/etc. console version
-	gvim72.zip	Windows 95/98/NT/etc. GUI version
-	gvim72ole.zip	Windows 95/98/NT/etc. GUI version with OLE
-	gvim72_s.zip	Windows 3.1 GUI version
+	vim73d16.zip	16 bit DOS version
+	vim73d32.zip	32 bit DOS version
+	vim73w32.zip	Windows 95/98/NT/etc. console version
+	gvim73.zip	Windows 95/98/NT/etc. GUI version
+	gvim73ole.zip	Windows 95/98/NT/etc. GUI version with OLE
+	gvim73_s.zip	Windows 3.1 GUI version
 
-You MUST also get the runtime archive (vim72rt.zip).
-The sources are also available (vim72src.zip).
+You MUST also get the runtime archive (vim73rt.zip).
+The sources are also available (vim73src.zip).

README_dos.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_dos.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_dos.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on MS-DOS and MS-Windows systems.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
@@ -47,13 +47,13 @@ These are the normal steps to install Vim from the .zip archives:
    Binary and runtime Vim archives are normally unpacked in the same location,
    on top of each other.
 
-2. Unpack the zip archives.  This will create a new directory "vim\vim72",
+2. Unpack the zip archives.  This will create a new directory "vim\vim73",
    in which all the distributed Vim files are placed.  Since the directory
    name includes the version number, it is unlikely that you overwrite
    existing files.
    Examples:
-	pkunzip -d gvim72.zip
-	unzip vim72w32.zip
+	pkunzip -d gvim73.zip
+	unzip vim73w32.zip
 
    You need to unpack the runtime archive and at least one of the binary
    archives.  When using more than one binary version, be careful not to
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ These are the normal steps to install Vim from the .zip archives:
    archive and follow the instructions in the documentation.
 
 3. Change to the new directory:
-	cd vim\vim72
+	cd vim\vim73
    Run the "install.exe" program.  It will ask you a number of questions about
    how you would like to have your Vim setup.  Among these are:
    - You can tell it to write a "_vimrc" file with your preferences in the
@@ -80,8 +80,8 @@ These are the normal steps to install Vim from the .zip archives:
      console or in a shell.  You can select one of the directories in your
      $PATH.  If you skip this, you can add Vim to the search path manually:
      The simplest is to add a line to your autoexec.bat.  Examples:
-	set path=%path%;C:\vim\vim72
-	set path=%path%;D:\editors\vim\vim72
+	set path=%path%;C:\vim\vim73
+	set path=%path%;D:\editors\vim\vim73
    - Create entries for Vim on the desktop and in the Start menu.
 
 That's it!
@@ -93,8 +93,8 @@ Remarks:
   won't show a menubar.  Then you need to set the $VIM environment variable to
   point to the top directory of your Vim files.  Example:
     set VIM=C:\editors\vim
-  Vim version 7.2 will look for your vimrc file in $VIM, and for the runtime
-  files in $VIM/vim72.  See ":help $VIM" for more information.
+  Vim version 7.3 will look for your vimrc file in $VIM, and for the runtime
+  files in $VIM/vim73.  See ":help $VIM" for more information.
 
 - To avoid confusion between distributed files of different versions and your
   own modified vim scripts, it is recommended to use this directory layout:
@@ -105,14 +105,14 @@ Remarks:
 	C:\vim\vimfiles\ftplugin\*.vim	Filetype plugins
 	C:\vim\...			Other files you made.
   Distributed files:
-	C:\vim\vim72\vim.exe		The Vim version 7.2 executable.
-	C:\vim\vim72\doc\*.txt		The version 7.2 documentation files.
-	C:\vim\vim72\bugreport.vim	A Vim version 7.2 script.
-	C:\vim\vim72\...		Other version 7.2 distributed files.
+	C:\vim\vim73\vim.exe		The Vim version 7.3 executable.
+	C:\vim\vim73\doc\*.txt		The version 7.3 documentation files.
+	C:\vim\vim73\bugreport.vim	A Vim version 7.3 script.
+	C:\vim\vim73\...		Other version 7.3 distributed files.
   In this case the $VIM environment variable would be set like this:
 	set VIM=C:\vim
-  Then $VIMRUNTIME will automatically be set to "$VIM\vim72".  Don't add
-  "vim72" to $VIM, that won't work.
+  Then $VIMRUNTIME will automatically be set to "$VIM\vim73".  Don't add
+  "vim73" to $VIM, that won't work.
 
 - You can put your Vim executable anywhere else.  If the executable is not
   with the other Vim files, you should set $VIM. The simplest is to add a line
@@ -136,8 +136,8 @@ Remarks:
      Select Properties.
   5. In the Program tab, change the "Cmdline" to add "/c" and the name of the
      Vim executable.  Examples:
-	C:\command.com /c C:\vim\vim72\vim.exe
-	C:\command.com /c D:\editors\vim\vim72\vim.exe
+	C:\command.com /c C:\vim\vim73\vim.exe
+	C:\command.com /c D:\editors\vim\vim73\vim.exe
   6. Select the font, window size, etc. that you like.  If this isn't
      possible, select "Advanced" in the Program tab, and deselect "MS-DOS
      mode".

README_extra.txt

@@ -1,61 +1,54 @@
-README_extra.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_extra.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
-The extra archive of Vim is to be used in combination with the source archive
-(vim-7.2-src.tar.gz).  The extra archive is useless without it.
-
-For more information, see the "README.txt" file that comes with the runtime
-archive (vim-7.2-rt.tar.gz).  To be able to run Vim you MUST get the runtime
-archive too!
-
-The extra archive plus the source and runtime achives make up the complete
-sources of Vim for all systems.
+These extra files of Vim are for special purposes.  This README explains what
+the files are for.  For general information about Vim, see the "README.txt"
+file.
 
 
-Some of the things that the extra archive contains:
+farsi/*			Files for the Farsi (persian) language.  If you don't
+			know what Farsi is, this is not for you.
 
-Farsi		Files for the Farsi (persian) language.  If you don't know
-		what Farsi is, this is not for you.
+src/if_sniff.*		Interface to SNiFF.  If you don't know what SNiFF is,
+			this is not for you.
 
-if_sniff	Interface to SNiFF.  If you don't know what SNiFF is, this is
-		not for you.
+src/os_amiga.*		Files for the Amiga port.
 
-os_amiga	Files for the Amiga port.
+src/gui_riscos.*
+src/os_riscos.*		Files for the RISC OS port.
 
-gui_riscos
-os_riscos	Files for the RISC OS port.
+src/gui_beos.*
+src/os_beos.*		Files for the BeOS port.
 
-gui_beos
-os_beos		Files for the BeOS port.
+src/os_msdos.*
+src/os_dos.*		Files for the MS-DOS port.
 
-os_msdos
-os_dos		Files for the MS-DOS port.
+src/gui_mac.*
+src/os_mac.*		Files for the Mac port.
 
-gui_mac
-os_mac		Files for the Mac port.
+src/os_mint.8		Files for the Atari Mint port.
 
-os_mint		Files for the Atari Mint port.
+src/os_os2*		Files for the OS/2 port.
+src/tee/*		Extra program for OS/2.
 
-os_os2		Files for the OS/2 port.
-tee		Extra program for OS/2.
+src/os_vms*		Files for the VMS port.
 
-os_vms		Files for the VMS port.
+src/os_w32*
+src/os_win32.*		Files for the Win32 port.
 
-os_w32
-os_win32	Files for the Win32 port.
+src/gui_w32.*		Files for the Win32 GUI.
+src/gui_w48.*		Files for the Win32 and Win16 GUI.
+src/Make_mvc.mak	MS Visual C++ makefile for the Win32 GUI.
+runtime/rgb.txt		File with color definitions for the Win32 GUI.
 
-gui_w32		Files for the Win32 GUI.
-gui_w48		Files for the Win32 and Win16 GUI.
-Make_mvc.mak	MS Visual C++ makefile for the Win32 GUI.
-rgb.txt		File with color definitions for the Win32 GUI.
+src/if_ole.*		OLE automation interface, for MS Windows 95 and NT.
 
-if_ole		OLE automation interface, for MS Windows 95 and NT.
+src/VisVim/*		Integration of Win32 GUI with MS Visual Developer
+			Studio.
 
-VisVim		Integration of Win32 GUI with MS Visual Developer Studio.
+src/GvimExt/*		DLL for the "Edit with Vim" context menu entry
 
-GvimExt		DLL for the "Edit with Vim" context menu entry
+nsis/*			NSIS script to build the self-installing MS-Windows exe
 
-nsis		NSIS script to build the self-installing MS-Windows exe
+runtime/doc/*.man	Preprocessed manual pages.
 
-*.man		Preprocessed manual pages.
-
-file_select.vim	Vim script to browse directories (Unix only).
+runtime/macros/file_select.vim	Vim script to browse directories (Unix only).

README_lang.txt

@@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
-README_lang.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
-
-This file contains files for non-English languages:
-- Translated messages.
-- Translated menus.

README_mac.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_mac.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_mac.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on Macintosh systems.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.

README_ole.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_ole.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_ole.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This archive contains gvim.exe with OLE interface and VisVim.
 This version of gvim.exe can also load a number of interface dynamically (you
@@ -16,5 +16,5 @@ Win32 with OLE - "MS-Windows 32 bit GUI version with OLE support"
 For further information, type this inside Vim:
 	:help if_ole
 
-Futhermore, this archive contains VISVIM.DLL.  It can be used to integrate
+Furthermore, this archive contains VISVIM.DLL.  It can be used to integrate
 the OLE gvim with Microsoft Visual Developer Studio.  See VisVim/README.txt.

README_os2.txt

@@ -1,32 +1,32 @@
-README_os2.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_os2.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on OS/2 systems.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 
 
 NOTE: You will need two archives:
-  vim72rt.zip	contains the runtime files (same as for the PC version)
-  vim72os2.zip	contains the OS/2 executables
+  vim73rt.zip	contains the runtime files (same as for the PC version)
+  vim73os2.zip	contains the OS/2 executables
 
 1. Go to the directory where you want to put the Vim files.  Examples:
 	cd C:\
 	cd D:\editors
 
-2. Unpack the zip archives.  This will create a new directory "vim/vim72",
+2. Unpack the zip archives.  This will create a new directory "vim/vim73",
    in which all the distributed Vim files are placed.  Since the directory
    name includes the version number, it is unlikely that you overwrite
    existing files.
    Examples:
-	pkunzip -d vim72os2.zip
-	unzip vim72os2.zip
+	pkunzip -d vim73os2.zip
+	unzip vim73os2.zip
 
    After you unpacked the files, you can still move the whole directory tree
    to another location.
 
 3. Add the directory where vim.exe is to your path.  The simplest is to add a
    line to your autoexec.bat.  Examples:
-	set path=%path%;C:\vim\vim72
-	set path=%path%;D:\editors\vim\vim72
+	set path=%path%;C:\vim\vim73
+	set path=%path%;D:\editors\vim\vim73
 
 That's it!
 
@@ -41,10 +41,10 @@ Extra remarks:
 	C:\vim\_viminfo			Dynamic info for 'viminfo'.
 	C:\vim\...			Other files you made.
   Distributed files:
-	C:\vim\vim72\vim.exe		The Vim version 7.2 executable.
-	C:\vim\vim72\doc\*.txt		The version 7.2 documentation files.
-	C:\vim\vim72\bugreport.vim	A Vim version 7.2 script.
-	C:\vim\vim72\...		Other version 7.2 distributed files.
+	C:\vim\vim73\vim.exe		The Vim version 7.3 executable.
+	C:\vim\vim73\doc\*.txt		The version 7.3 documentation files.
+	C:\vim\vim73\bugreport.vim	A Vim version 7.3 script.
+	C:\vim\vim73\...		Other version 7.3 distributed files.
   In this case the $VIM environment variable would be set like this:
 	set VIM=C:\vim
 

README_os390.txt

@@ -1,51 +1,84 @@
-README_os_390.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_zOS.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
-Welcome to the OS/390 Unix port of VIM.
+This readme explains how to build Vim on z/OS.  Formerly called OS/390.
+See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 
-ATTENTION: THIS IS AN _ALPHA_ VERSION!!!
-I expect you to know how to handle alpha software!
+Most likely there are not many users out there using Vim on z/OS. So chances
+are good, that some bugs are still undiscovered.
 
-This port was done by Ralf Schandl <schandl@de.ibm.com>.
-This port is not maintained or supported by IBM!!
+Getting the source to z/OS:
+==========================
 
+First get the source code in one big tar file and ftp it a binary to z/OS. If
+the tar file is initially compressed with gzip (tar.gz) or bzip2 (tar.bz2)
+uncompress it on your PC, as this tools are (most likely) not available on the
+mainframe.
 
-For the list of changes see runtime/doc/os_390.txt.
+To reduce the size of the tar file you might compress it into a zip file. On
+z/OS Unix you might have the command "jar" from java to uncompress a zip. Use:
+        jar xvf <zip file name>
+
+Unpack the tar file on z/OS with 
+        pax -o from=ISO8859-1,to=IBM-1047 -rf vim.tar
+
+Note: The Vim source contains a few bitmaps etc which will be destroyed by
+this command, but these files are not needed on zOS (at least not for the
+console version).
 
 
 Compiling:
-----------
+==========
 
-Note: After the file configure was created via autoconf, it had been
-      handedited, to make the test for ICEConnectionNumber work.
-      DO NOT run autoconf again!
+Vim can be compiled with or without GUI support. For 7.3 only the compilation
+without GUI was tested. Below is a section about compiling with X11 but this
+is from an earlier version of Vim.
 
-Without X11:
+Console only:
+-------------
 
 If you build VIM without X11 support, compiling and building is nearly
-straightforward. The only restriction is, that you can't call make from the
-VIM toplevel directory. Change to the src directory first and call make from
-there. Here is a what to do:
+straightforward. 
+
+Change to the vim directory and do:
 
     # Don't use c89!
-    # Make additional symbols visible.
     # Allow intermixing of compiler options and files.
 
     $ export CC=cc
-    $ export CFLAGS=-D_ALL_SOURCE
     $ export _CC_CCMODE=1
-    $./configure --enable-max-features --without-x --enable-gui=no
+    $./configure --with-features=big --without-x --enable-gui=no
     $ cd src
     $ make
+
+      There may be warnings:
+        - include files not found (libc, sys/param.h, ...)
+        - Redeclaration of ... differs from ...
+        -- just ignore them.
+
     $ make test
 
-      Note: Test 28 will be reported as failed. This is because diff can't
-	    compare files containing '\0' characters. Test 11 will fail if you
-	    don't have gzip.
+      This will produce lots of garbage on your screen (including error
+      messages). Don't worry.
+
+      If the test stops at one point in vim (might happen in test 11), just
+      press :q!
+
+      Expected test failures:
+        11: If you don't have gzip installed
+        24: test of backslash sequences in regexp are ASCII dependent
+        42: Multibyte is not supported on z/OS
+        55: ASCII<->EBCDIC sorting
+        57: ASCII<->EBCDIC sorting
+        58: Spell checking is not supported with EBCDIC
+        71: Blowfish encryption doesn't work
 
     $ make install
 
 
 With X11:
+---------
+
+WARNING: This instruction was not tested with Vim 7.3.
 
 There are two ways for building VIM with X11 support. The first way is simple
 and results in a big executable (~13 Mb), the second needs a few additional
@@ -54,8 +87,6 @@ you want Motif.
 
   The easy way:
     $ export CC=cc
-    $ export CFLAGS="-D_ALL_SOURCE -W c,dll"
-    $ export LDFLAGS="-W l,dll"
     $ export _CC_CCMODE=1
     $ ./configure --enable-max-features --enable-gui=motif
     $ cd src
@@ -65,7 +96,7 @@ you want Motif.
 
   The smarter way:
     Make VIM as described above. Then create a file named 'link.sed' with the
-    following contense:
+    following content (see src/link.390):
 
 	s/-lXext  *//g
 	s/-lXmu  *//g
@@ -84,47 +115,3 @@ you want Motif.
     See the Makefile and the file link.sh on how link.sed is used.
 
 
-Hint:
------
-Use the online help! (See weaknesses below.)
-
-Example:
-Enter ':help syntax' and then press <TAB> several times, you will switch
-through all help items containing 'syntax'. Press <ENTER> on the one you are
-interested at. Or press <Ctrl-D> and you will get a list of all items printed
-that contain 'syntax'.
-
-The helpfiles contains cross-references. Links are between '|'. Position the
-cursor on them and press <Ctrl-]> to follow this link. Use <Ctrl-T> to jump
-back.
-
-Known weaknesses:
------------------
-
-- You can't call make from the toplevel directory, you have to do a 'cd src'
-  first.  If you do it, make will call configure again. I don't know why and
-  didn't investigate it, there were more important things to do. If you can
-  make it work drop me a note.
-
-- The documentation was not updated for this alpha release. It contains lot of
-  ASCII dependencies, especially in examples.
-
-- Digraphs are dependent on code page 1047. Digraphs are used to enter
-  characters that normally cannot be entered by an ordinary keyboard.
-  See ":help digraphs".
-
-- Using 'ga' to show the code of the character under the cursor shows the
-  correct dec/hex/oct values, but the other informations might be missing or
-  wrong.
-
-- The sed syntax file doesn't work, it is ASCII dependent.
-
-Bugs:
------
-If you find a bug please inform me (schandl@de.ibm.com), don't disturb Bram
-Moolenaar. It's most likely a bug I introduced during porting or some ASCII
-dependency I didn't notice.
-
-Feedback:
----------
-Feedback welcome! Just drop me a note.

README_src.txt

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
-README_src.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_src.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 The source archive contains the files needed to compile Vim on Unix systems.
 It is packed for Unix systems (NL line separator).  It is also used for other
-systems in combination with the extra archive (vim-7.2-extra.tar.gz, in the
+systems in combination with the extra archive (vim-7.3-extra.tar.gz, in the
 "extra" directory of ftp.vim.org).
 
 For more information, see the README.txt file that comes with the runtime
-archive (vim-7.2-rt.tar.gz).  To be able to run Vim you MUST get the runtime
+archive (vim-7.3-rt.tar.gz).  To be able to run Vim you MUST get the runtime
 archive too!

README_srcdos.txt

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-README_srcdos.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_srcdos.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
 See "README_dos.txt" for installation instructions for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
-These files are in the runtime archive (vim72rt.zip).
+These files are in the runtime archive (vim73rt.zip).
 
 
 The DOS source archive contains the files needed to compile Vim on MS-DOS or

README_unix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_unix.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_unix.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on Unix systems.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.

README_vms.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_vms.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_vms.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This file explains the installation of Vim on VMS systems.
 See "README.txt" in the runtime archive for information about Vim.

README_w32s.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-README_w32s.txt for version 7.2 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+README_w32s.txt for version 7.3 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 This archive contains the gvim.exe that was specifically compiled for use in
 the Win32s subsystem in MS-Windows 3.1 and 3.11.

nsis/gvim.nsi

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 # NSIS file to create a self-installing exe for Vim.
 # It requires NSIS version 2.0 or later.
-# Last change:	2004 May 02
+# Last Change:	2010 Jul 30
 
 # WARNING: if you make changes to this script, look out for $0 to be valid,
 # because uninstall deletes most files in $0.
@@ -22,17 +22,20 @@
 !define HAVE_NLS
 
 !define VER_MAJOR 7
-!define VER_MINOR 2
+!define VER_MINOR 3
 
 # ----------- No configurable settings below this line -----------
 
 !include UpgradeDLL.nsh		# for VisVim.dll
+!include LogicLib.nsh
+!include x64.nsh
 
 Name "Vim ${VER_MAJOR}.${VER_MINOR}"
 OutFile gvim${VER_MAJOR}${VER_MINOR}.exe
 CRCCheck force
 SetCompressor lzma
 SetDatablockOptimize on
+RequestExecutionLevel highest
 
 ComponentText "This will install Vim ${VER_MAJOR}.${VER_MINOR} on your computer."
 DirText "Choose a directory to install Vim (must end in 'vim')"
@@ -290,13 +293,21 @@ Section "Add an Edit-with-Vim context menu entry"
 	SetOutPath $0
 	ClearErrors
 	SetOverwrite try
-	File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+	${If} ${RunningX64}
+	  File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext64.dll
+	${Else}
+	  File /oname=gvimext.dll ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+	${EndIf}
 	IfErrors 0 GvimExtDone
 
 	# Can't copy gvimext.dll, create it under another name and rename it on
 	# next reboot.
 	GetTempFileName $3 $0
-	File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+	${If} ${RunningX64}
+	  File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext64.dll
+	${Else}
+	  File /oname=$3 ${VIMSRC}\GvimExt\gvimext.dll
+	${EndIf}
 	Rename /REBOOTOK $3 $0\gvimext.dll
 
 	GvimExtDone:
@@ -438,8 +449,8 @@ Section Uninstall
 
 	  AskRemove:
 	    MessageBox MB_YESNO|MB_ICONQUESTION \
-	      "Remove all files in your $1\vimfiles directory? \
-	      $\nIf you have created something there that you want to keep, click No" IDNO Fin
+	      "Remove all files in your $1\vimfiles directory?$\n \
+	      $\nCAREFUL: If you have created something there that you want to keep, click No" IDNO Fin
 	    RMDir /r $1\vimfiles
 	  NoRemove:
 

runtime/autoload/ccomplete.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2007 Aug 30
+" Last Change:	2010 Mar 23
 
 
 " This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ function! ccomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
       let res = [{'match': match, 'tagline' : '', 'kind' : kind, 'info' : line}]
     else
       " Completing "var.", "var.something", etc.
-      let res = s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 0, col), items[-1], 0, 1)
+      let res = s:Nextitem(strpart(line, 0, col), items[1:], 0, 1)
     endif
   endif
 

runtime/autoload/python3complete.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,606 @@
+"python3complete.vim - Omni Completion for python
+" Maintainer: Aaron Griffin <aaronmgriffin@gmail.com>
+" Version: 0.9
+" Last Updated: 18 Jun 2009
+"
+" Roland Puntaier: this file contains adaptations for python3 and is parallel to pythoncomplete.vim
+"
+" Changes
+" TODO:
+" 'info' item output can use some formatting work
+" Add an "unsafe eval" mode, to allow for return type evaluation
+" Complete basic syntax along with import statements
+"   i.e. "import url<c-x,c-o>"
+" Continue parsing on invalid line??
+"
+" v 0.9
+"   * Fixed docstring parsing for classes and functions
+"   * Fixed parsing of *args and **kwargs type arguments
+"   * Better function param parsing to handle things like tuples and
+"     lambda defaults args
+"
+" v 0.8
+"   * Fixed an issue where the FIRST assignment was always used instead of
+"   using a subsequent assignment for a variable
+"   * Fixed a scoping issue when working inside a parameterless function
+"
+"
+" v 0.7
+"   * Fixed function list sorting (_ and __ at the bottom)
+"   * Removed newline removal from docs.  It appears vim handles these better in
+"   recent patches
+"
+" v 0.6:
+"   * Fixed argument completion
+"   * Removed the 'kind' completions, as they are better indicated
+"   with real syntax
+"   * Added tuple assignment parsing (whoops, that was forgotten)
+"   * Fixed import handling when flattening scope
+"
+" v 0.5:
+" Yeah, I skipped a version number - 0.4 was never public.
+"  It was a bugfix version on top of 0.3.  This is a complete
+"  rewrite.
+"
+
+if !has('python3')
+    echo "Error: Required vim compiled with +python3"
+    finish
+endif
+
+function! python3complete#Complete(findstart, base)
+    "findstart = 1 when we need to get the text length
+    if a:findstart == 1
+        let line = getline('.')
+        let idx = col('.')
+        while idx > 0
+            let idx -= 1
+            let c = line[idx]
+            if c =~ '\w'
+                continue
+            elseif ! c =~ '\.'
+                let idx = -1
+                break
+            else
+                break
+            endif
+        endwhile
+
+        return idx
+    "findstart = 0 when we need to return the list of completions
+    else
+        "vim no longer moves the cursor upon completion... fix that
+        let line = getline('.')
+        let idx = col('.')
+        let cword = ''
+        while idx > 0
+            let idx -= 1
+            let c = line[idx]
+            if c =~ '\w' || c =~ '\.'
+                let cword = c . cword
+                continue
+            elseif strlen(cword) > 0 || idx == 0
+                break
+            endif
+        endwhile
+        execute "py3 vimpy3complete('" . cword . "', '" . a:base . "')"
+        return g:python3complete_completions
+    endif
+endfunction
+
+function! s:DefPython()
+py3 << PYTHONEOF
+import sys, tokenize, io, types
+from token import NAME, DEDENT, NEWLINE, STRING
+
+debugstmts=[]
+def dbg(s): debugstmts.append(s)
+def showdbg():
+    for d in debugstmts: print("DBG: %s " % d)
+
+def vimpy3complete(context,match):
+    global debugstmts
+    debugstmts = []
+    try:
+        import vim
+        cmpl = Completer()
+        cmpl.evalsource('\n'.join(vim.current.buffer),vim.eval("line('.')"))
+        all = cmpl.get_completions(context,match)
+        all.sort(key=lambda x:x['abbr'].replace('_','z'))
+        dictstr = '['
+        # have to do this for double quoting
+        for cmpl in all:
+            dictstr += '{'
+            for x in cmpl: dictstr += '"%s":"%s",' % (x,cmpl[x])
+            dictstr += '"icase":0},'
+        if dictstr[-1] == ',': dictstr = dictstr[:-1]
+        dictstr += ']'
+        #dbg("dict: %s" % dictstr)
+        vim.command("silent let g:python3complete_completions = %s" % dictstr)
+        #dbg("Completion dict:\n%s" % all)
+    except vim.error:
+        dbg("VIM Error: %s" % vim.error)
+
+class Completer(object):
+    def __init__(self):
+       self.compldict = {}
+       self.parser = PyParser()
+
+    def evalsource(self,text,line=0):
+        sc = self.parser.parse(text,line)
+        src = sc.get_code()
+        dbg("source: %s" % src)
+        try: exec(src,self.compldict)
+        except: dbg("parser: %s, %s" % (sys.exc_info()[0],sys.exc_info()[1]))
+        for l in sc.locals:
+            try: exec(l,self.compldict)
+            except: dbg("locals: %s, %s [%s]" % (sys.exc_info()[0],sys.exc_info()[1],l))
+
+    def _cleanstr(self,doc):
+        return doc.replace('"',' ').replace("'",' ')
+
+    def get_arguments(self,func_obj):
+        def _ctor(class_ob):
+            try: return class_ob.__init__
+            except AttributeError:
+                for base in class_ob.__bases__:
+                    rc = _ctor(base)
+                    if rc is not None: return rc
+            return None
+
+        arg_offset = 1
+        if type(func_obj) == type: func_obj = _ctor(func_obj)
+        elif type(func_obj) == types.MethodType: arg_offset = 1
+        else: arg_offset = 0
+
+        arg_text=''
+        if type(func_obj) in [types.FunctionType, types.LambdaType,types.MethodType]:
+            try:
+                cd = func_obj.__code__
+                real_args = cd.co_varnames[arg_offset:cd.co_argcount]
+                defaults = func_obj.__defaults__ or []
+                defaults = ["=%s" % name for name in defaults]
+                defaults = [""] * (len(real_args)-len(defaults)) + defaults
+                items = [a+d for a,d in zip(real_args,defaults)]
+                if func_obj.__code__.co_flags & 0x4:
+                    items.append("...")
+                if func_obj.__code__.co_flags & 0x8:
+                    items.append("***")
+                arg_text = (','.join(items)) + ')'
+            except:
+                dbg("arg completion: %s: %s" % (sys.exc_info()[0],sys.exc_info()[1]))
+                pass
+        if len(arg_text) == 0:
+            # The doc string sometimes contains the function signature
+            #  this works for alot of C modules that are part of the
+            #  standard library
+            doc = func_obj.__doc__
+            if doc:
+                doc = doc.lstrip()
+                pos = doc.find('\n')
+                if pos > 0:
+                    sigline = doc[:pos]
+                    lidx = sigline.find('(')
+                    ridx = sigline.find(')')
+                    if lidx > 0 and ridx > 0:
+                        arg_text = sigline[lidx+1:ridx] + ')'
+        if len(arg_text) == 0: arg_text = ')'
+        return arg_text
+
+    def get_completions(self,context,match):
+        #dbg("get_completions('%s','%s')" % (context,match))
+        stmt = ''
+        if context: stmt += str(context)
+        if match: stmt += str(match)
+        try:
+            result = None
+            all = {}
+            ridx = stmt.rfind('.')
+            if len(stmt) > 0 and stmt[-1] == '(':
+                result = eval(_sanitize(stmt[:-1]), self.compldict)
+                doc = result.__doc__
+                if doc is None: doc = ''
+                args = self.get_arguments(result)
+                return [{'word':self._cleanstr(args),'info':self._cleanstr(doc)}]
+            elif ridx == -1:
+                match = stmt
+                all = self.compldict
+            else:
+                match = stmt[ridx+1:]
+                stmt = _sanitize(stmt[:ridx])
+                result = eval(stmt, self.compldict)
+                all = dir(result)
+
+            dbg("completing: stmt:%s" % stmt)
+            completions = []
+
+            try: maindoc = result.__doc__
+            except: maindoc = ' '
+            if maindoc is None: maindoc = ' '
+            for m in all:
+                if m == "_PyCmplNoType": continue #this is internal
+                try:
+                    dbg('possible completion: %s' % m)
+                    if m.find(match) == 0:
+                        if result is None: inst = all[m]
+                        else: inst = getattr(result,m)
+                        try: doc = inst.__doc__
+                        except: doc = maindoc
+                        typestr = str(inst)
+                        if doc is None or doc == '': doc = maindoc
+
+                        wrd = m[len(match):]
+                        c = {'word':wrd, 'abbr':m,  'info':self._cleanstr(doc)}
+                        if "function" in typestr:
+                            c['word'] += '('
+                            c['abbr'] += '(' + self._cleanstr(self.get_arguments(inst))
+                        elif "method" in typestr:
+                            c['word'] += '('
+                            c['abbr'] += '(' + self._cleanstr(self.get_arguments(inst))
+                        elif "module" in typestr:
+                            c['word'] += '.'
+                        elif "type" in typestr:
+                            c['word'] += '('
+                            c['abbr'] += '('
+                        completions.append(c)
+                except:
+                    i = sys.exc_info()
+                    dbg("inner completion: %s,%s [stmt='%s']" % (i[0],i[1],stmt))
+            return completions
+        except:
+            i = sys.exc_info()
+            dbg("completion: %s,%s [stmt='%s']" % (i[0],i[1],stmt))
+            return []
+
+class Scope(object):
+    def __init__(self,name,indent,docstr=''):
+        self.subscopes = []
+        self.docstr = docstr
+        self.locals = []
+        self.parent = None
+        self.name = name
+        self.indent = indent
+
+    def add(self,sub):
+        #print('push scope: [%s@%s]' % (sub.name,sub.indent))
+        sub.parent = self
+        self.subscopes.append(sub)
+        return sub
+
+    def doc(self,str):
+        """ Clean up a docstring """
+        d = str.replace('\n',' ')
+        d = d.replace('\t',' ')
+        while d.find('  ') > -1: d = d.replace('  ',' ')
+        while d[0] in '"\'\t ': d = d[1:]
+        while d[-1] in '"\'\t ': d = d[:-1]
+        dbg("Scope(%s)::docstr = %s" % (self,d))
+        self.docstr = d
+
+    def local(self,loc):
+        self._checkexisting(loc)
+        self.locals.append(loc)
+
+    def copy_decl(self,indent=0):
+        """ Copy a scope's declaration only, at the specified indent level - not local variables """
+        return Scope(self.name,indent,self.docstr)
+
+    def _checkexisting(self,test):
+        "Convienance function... keep out duplicates"
+        if test.find('=') > -1:
+            var = test.split('=')[0].strip()
+            for l in self.locals:
+                if l.find('=') > -1 and var == l.split('=')[0].strip():
+                    self.locals.remove(l)
+
+    def get_code(self):
+        str = ""
+        if len(self.docstr) > 0: str += '"""'+self.docstr+'"""\n'
+        for l in self.locals:
+            if l.startswith('import'): str += l+'\n'
+        str += 'class _PyCmplNoType:\n    def __getattr__(self,name):\n        return None\n'
+        for sub in self.subscopes:
+            str += sub.get_code()
+        for l in self.locals:
+            if not l.startswith('import'): str += l+'\n'
+
+        return str
+
+    def pop(self,indent):
+        #print('pop scope: [%s] to [%s]' % (self.indent,indent))
+        outer = self
+        while outer.parent != None and outer.indent >= indent:
+            outer = outer.parent
+        return outer
+
+    def currentindent(self):
+        #print('parse current indent: %s' % self.indent)
+        return '    '*self.indent
+
+    def childindent(self):
+        #print('parse child indent: [%s]' % (self.indent+1))
+        return '    '*(self.indent+1)
+
+class Class(Scope):
+    def __init__(self, name, supers, indent, docstr=''):
+        Scope.__init__(self,name,indent, docstr)
+        self.supers = supers
+    def copy_decl(self,indent=0):
+        c = Class(self.name,self.supers,indent, self.docstr)
+        for s in self.subscopes:
+            c.add(s.copy_decl(indent+1))
+        return c
+    def get_code(self):
+        str = '%sclass %s' % (self.currentindent(),self.name)
+        if len(self.supers) > 0: str += '(%s)' % ','.join(self.supers)
+        str += ':\n'
+        if len(self.docstr) > 0: str += self.childindent()+'"""'+self.docstr+'"""\n'
+        if len(self.subscopes) > 0:
+            for s in self.subscopes: str += s.get_code()
+        else:
+            str += '%spass\n' % self.childindent()
+        return str
+
+
+class Function(Scope):
+    def __init__(self, name, params, indent, docstr=''):
+        Scope.__init__(self,name,indent, docstr)
+        self.params = params
+    def copy_decl(self,indent=0):
+        return Function(self.name,self.params,indent, self.docstr)
+    def get_code(self):
+        str = "%sdef %s(%s):\n" % \
+            (self.currentindent(),self.name,','.join(self.params))
+        if len(self.docstr) > 0: str += self.childindent()+'"""'+self.docstr+'"""\n'
+        str += "%spass\n" % self.childindent()
+        return str
+
+class PyParser:
+    def __init__(self):
+        self.top = Scope('global',0)
+        self.scope = self.top
+
+    def _parsedotname(self,pre=None):
+        #returns (dottedname, nexttoken)
+        name = []
+        if pre is None:
+            tokentype, token, indent = self.donext()
+            if tokentype != NAME and token != '*':
+                return ('', token)
+        else: token = pre
+        name.append(token)
+        while True:
+            tokentype, token, indent = self.donext()
+            if token != '.': break
+            tokentype, token, indent = self.donext()
+            if tokentype != NAME: break
+            name.append(token)
+        return (".".join(name), token)
+
+    def _parseimportlist(self):
+        imports = []
+        while True:
+            name, token = self._parsedotname()
+            if not name: break
+            name2 = ''
+            if token == 'as': name2, token = self._parsedotname()
+            imports.append((name, name2))
+            while token != "," and "\n" not in token:
+                tokentype, token, indent = self.donext()
+            if token != ",": break
+        return imports
+
+    def _parenparse(self):
+        name = ''
+        names = []
+        level = 1
+        while True:
+            tokentype, token, indent = self.donext()
+            if token in (')', ',') and level == 1:
+                if '=' not in name: name = name.replace(' ', '')
+                names.append(name.strip())
+                name = ''
+            if token == '(':
+                level += 1
+                name += "("
+            elif token == ')':
+                level -= 1
+                if level == 0: break
+                else: name += ")"
+            elif token == ',' and level == 1:
+                pass
+            else:
+                name += "%s " % str(token)
+        return names
+
+    def _parsefunction(self,indent):
+        self.scope=self.scope.pop(indent)
+        tokentype, fname, ind = self.donext()
+        if tokentype != NAME: return None
+
+        tokentype, open, ind = self.donext()
+        if open != '(': return None
+        params=self._parenparse()
+
+        tokentype, colon, ind = self.donext()
+        if colon != ':': return None
+
+        return Function(fname,params,indent)
+
+    def _parseclass(self,indent):
+        self.scope=self.scope.pop(indent)
+        tokentype, cname, ind = self.donext()
+        if tokentype != NAME: return None
+
+        super = []
+        tokentype, thenext, ind = self.donext()
+        if thenext == '(':
+            super=self._parenparse()
+        elif thenext != ':': return None
+
+        return Class(cname,super,indent)
+
+    def _parseassignment(self):
+        assign=''
+        tokentype, token, indent = self.donext()
+        if tokentype == tokenize.STRING or token == 'str':  
+            return '""'
+        elif token == '(' or token == 'tuple':
+            return '()'
+        elif token == '[' or token == 'list':
+            return '[]'
+        elif token == '{' or token == 'dict':
+            return '{}'
+        elif tokentype == tokenize.NUMBER:
+            return '0'
+        elif token == 'open' or token == 'file':
+            return 'file'
+        elif token == 'None':
+            return '_PyCmplNoType()'
+        elif token == 'type':
+            return 'type(_PyCmplNoType)' #only for method resolution
+        else:
+            assign += token
+            level = 0
+            while True:
+                tokentype, token, indent = self.donext()
+                if token in ('(','{','['):
+                    level += 1
+                elif token in (']','}',')'):
+                    level -= 1
+                    if level == 0: break
+                elif level == 0:
+                    if token in (';','\n'): break
+                    assign += token
+        return "%s" % assign
+
+    def donext(self):
+        type, token, (lineno, indent), end, self.parserline = next(self.gen)
+        if lineno == self.curline:
+            #print('line found [%s] scope=%s' % (line.replace('\n',''),self.scope.name))
+            self.currentscope = self.scope
+        return (type, token, indent)
+
+    def _adjustvisibility(self):
+        newscope = Scope('result',0)
+        scp = self.currentscope
+        while scp != None:
+            if type(scp) == Function:
+                slice = 0
+                #Handle 'self' params
+                if scp.parent != None and type(scp.parent) == Class:
+                    slice = 1
+                    newscope.local('%s = %s' % (scp.params[0],scp.parent.name))
+                for p in scp.params[slice:]:
+                    i = p.find('=')
+                    if len(p) == 0: continue
+                    pvar = ''
+                    ptype = ''
+                    if i == -1:
+                        pvar = p
+                        ptype = '_PyCmplNoType()'
+                    else:
+                        pvar = p[:i]
+                        ptype = _sanitize(p[i+1:])
+                    if pvar.startswith('**'):
+                        pvar = pvar[2:]
+                        ptype = '{}'
+                    elif pvar.startswith('*'):
+                        pvar = pvar[1:]
+                        ptype = '[]'
+
+                    newscope.local('%s = %s' % (pvar,ptype))
+
+            for s in scp.subscopes:
+                ns = s.copy_decl(0)
+                newscope.add(ns)
+            for l in scp.locals: newscope.local(l)
+            scp = scp.parent
+
+        self.currentscope = newscope
+        return self.currentscope
+
+    #p.parse(vim.current.buffer[:],vim.eval("line('.')"))
+    def parse(self,text,curline=0):
+        self.curline = int(curline)
+        buf = io.StringIO(''.join(text) + '\n')
+        self.gen = tokenize.generate_tokens(buf.readline)
+        self.currentscope = self.scope
+
+        try:
+            freshscope=True
+            while True:
+                tokentype, token, indent = self.donext()
+                #dbg( 'main: token=[%s] indent=[%s]' % (token,indent))
+
+                if tokentype == DEDENT or token == "pass":
+                    self.scope = self.scope.pop(indent)
+                elif token == 'def':
+                    func = self._parsefunction(indent)
+                    if func is None:
+                        print("function: syntax error...")
+                        continue
+                    dbg("new scope: function")
+                    freshscope = True
+                    self.scope = self.scope.add(func)
+                elif token == 'class':
+                    cls = self._parseclass(indent)
+                    if cls is None:
+                        print("class: syntax error...")
+                        continue
+                    freshscope = True
+                    dbg("new scope: class")
+                    self.scope = self.scope.add(cls)
+                    
+                elif token == 'import':
+                    imports = self._parseimportlist()
+                    for mod, alias in imports:
+                        loc = "import %s" % mod
+                        if len(alias) > 0: loc += " as %s" % alias
+                        self.scope.local(loc)
+                    freshscope = False
+                elif token == 'from':
+                    mod, token = self._parsedotname()
+                    if not mod or token != "import":
+                        print("from: syntax error...")
+                        continue
+                    names = self._parseimportlist()
+                    for name, alias in names:
+                        loc = "from %s import %s" % (mod,name)
+                        if len(alias) > 0: loc += " as %s" % alias
+                        self.scope.local(loc)
+                    freshscope = False
+                elif tokentype == STRING:
+                    if freshscope: self.scope.doc(token)
+                elif tokentype == NAME:
+                    name,token = self._parsedotname(token) 
+                    if token == '=':
+                        stmt = self._parseassignment()
+                        dbg("parseassignment: %s = %s" % (name, stmt))
+                        if stmt != None:
+                            self.scope.local("%s = %s" % (name,stmt))
+                    freshscope = False
+        except StopIteration: #thrown on EOF
+            pass
+        except:
+            dbg("parse error: %s, %s @ %s" %
+                (sys.exc_info()[0], sys.exc_info()[1], self.parserline))
+        return self._adjustvisibility()
+
+def _sanitize(str):
+    val = ''
+    level = 0
+    for c in str:
+        if c in ('(','{','['):
+            level += 1
+        elif c in (']','}',')'):
+            level -= 1
+        elif level == 0:
+            val += c
+    return val
+
+sys.path.extend(['.','..'])
+PYTHONEOF
+endfunction
+
+call s:DefPython()

runtime/autoload/pythoncomplete.vim

@@ -1,17 +1,28 @@
 "pythoncomplete.vim - Omni Completion for python
 " Maintainer: Aaron Griffin <aaronmgriffin@gmail.com>
-" Version: 0.7
-" Last Updated: 19 Oct 2006
+" Version: 0.9
+" Last Updated: 18 Jun 2009
 "
 " Changes
 " TODO:
-" User defined docstrings aren't handled right...
 " 'info' item output can use some formatting work
 " Add an "unsafe eval" mode, to allow for return type evaluation
 " Complete basic syntax along with import statements
 "   i.e. "import url<c-x,c-o>"
 " Continue parsing on invalid line??
 "
+" v 0.9
+"   * Fixed docstring parsing for classes and functions
+"   * Fixed parsing of *args and **kwargs type arguments
+"   * Better function param parsing to handle things like tuples and
+"     lambda defaults args
+"
+" v 0.8
+"   * Fixed an issue where the FIRST assignment was always used instead of
+"   using a subsequent assignment for a variable
+"   * Fixed a scoping issue when working inside a parameterless function
+"
+"
 " v 0.7
 "   * Fixed function list sorting (_ and __ at the bottom)
 "   * Removed newline removal from docs.  It appears vim handles these better in
@@ -63,7 +74,7 @@ function! pythoncomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
         while idx > 0
             let idx -= 1
             let c = line[idx]
-            if c =~ '\w' || c =~ '\.' || c == '('
+            if c =~ '\w' || c =~ '\.'
                 let cword = c . cword
                 continue
             elseif strlen(cword) > 0 || idx == 0
@@ -206,7 +217,7 @@ class Completer(object):
             if len(stmt) > 0 and stmt[-1] == '(':
                 result = eval(_sanitize(stmt[:-1]), self.compldict)
                 doc = result.__doc__
-                if doc == None: doc = ''
+                if doc is None: doc = ''
                 args = self.get_arguments(result)
                 return [{'word':self._cleanstr(args),'info':self._cleanstr(doc)}]
             elif ridx == -1:
@@ -223,18 +234,18 @@ class Completer(object):
 
             try: maindoc = result.__doc__
             except: maindoc = ' '
-            if maindoc == None: maindoc = ' '
+            if maindoc is None: maindoc = ' '
             for m in all:
                 if m == "_PyCmplNoType": continue #this is internal
                 try:
                     dbg('possible completion: %s' % m)
                     if m.find(match) == 0:
-                        if result == None: inst = all[m]
+                        if result is None: inst = all[m]
                         else: inst = getattr(result,m)
                         try: doc = inst.__doc__
                         except: doc = maindoc
                         typestr = str(inst)
-                        if doc == None or doc == '': doc = maindoc
+                        if doc is None or doc == '': doc = maindoc
 
                         wrd = m[len(match):]
                         c = {'word':wrd, 'abbr':m,  'info':self._cleanstr(doc)}
@@ -260,9 +271,9 @@ class Completer(object):
             return []
 
 class Scope(object):
-    def __init__(self,name,indent):
+    def __init__(self,name,indent,docstr=''):
         self.subscopes = []
-        self.docstr = ''
+        self.docstr = docstr
         self.locals = []
         self.parent = None
         self.name = name
@@ -281,29 +292,28 @@ class Scope(object):
         while d.find('  ') > -1: d = d.replace('  ',' ')
         while d[0] in '"\'\t ': d = d[1:]
         while d[-1] in '"\'\t ': d = d[:-1]
+        dbg("Scope(%s)::docstr = %s" % (self,d))
         self.docstr = d
 
     def local(self,loc):
-        if not self._hasvaralready(loc):
-            self.locals.append(loc)
+        self._checkexisting(loc)
+        self.locals.append(loc)
 
     def copy_decl(self,indent=0):
         """ Copy a scope's declaration only, at the specified indent level - not local variables """
-        return Scope(self.name,indent)
+        return Scope(self.name,indent,self.docstr)
 
-    def _hasvaralready(self,test):
+    def _checkexisting(self,test):
         "Convienance function... keep out duplicates"
         if test.find('=') > -1:
             var = test.split('=')[0].strip()
             for l in self.locals:
                 if l.find('=') > -1 and var == l.split('=')[0].strip():
-                    return True
-        return False
+                    self.locals.remove(l)
 
     def get_code(self):
-        # we need to start with this, to fix up broken completions
-        # hopefully this name is unique enough...
-        str = '"""'+self.docstr+'"""\n'
+        str = ""
+        if len(self.docstr) > 0: str += '"""'+self.docstr+'"""\n'
         for l in self.locals:
             if l.startswith('import'): str += l+'\n'
         str += 'class _PyCmplNoType:\n    def __getattr__(self,name):\n        return None\n'
@@ -330,11 +340,11 @@ class Scope(object):
         return '    '*(self.indent+1)
 
 class Class(Scope):
-    def __init__(self, name, supers, indent):
-        Scope.__init__(self,name,indent)
+    def __init__(self, name, supers, indent, docstr=''):
+        Scope.__init__(self,name,indent, docstr)
         self.supers = supers
     def copy_decl(self,indent=0):
-        c = Class(self.name,self.supers,indent)
+        c = Class(self.name,self.supers,indent, self.docstr)
         for s in self.subscopes:
             c.add(s.copy_decl(indent+1))
         return c
@@ -351,11 +361,11 @@ class Class(Scope):
 
 
 class Function(Scope):
-    def __init__(self, name, params, indent):
-        Scope.__init__(self,name,indent)
+    def __init__(self, name, params, indent, docstr=''):
+        Scope.__init__(self,name,indent, docstr)
         self.params = params
     def copy_decl(self,indent=0):
-        return Function(self.name,self.params,indent)
+        return Function(self.name,self.params,indent, self.docstr)
     def get_code(self):
         str = "%sdef %s(%s):\n" % \
             (self.currentindent(),self.name,','.join(self.params))
@@ -371,7 +381,7 @@ class PyParser:
     def _parsedotname(self,pre=None):
         #returns (dottedname, nexttoken)
         name = []
-        if pre == None:
+        if pre is None:
             tokentype, token, indent = self.next()
             if tokentype != NAME and token != '*':
                 return ('', token)
@@ -405,17 +415,20 @@ class PyParser:
         while True:
             tokentype, token, indent = self.next()
             if token in (')', ',') and level == 1:
-                names.append(name)
+                if '=' not in name: name = name.replace(' ', '')
+                names.append(name.strip())
                 name = ''
             if token == '(':
                 level += 1
+                name += "("
             elif token == ')':
                 level -= 1
                 if level == 0: break
+                else: name += ")"
             elif token == ',' and level == 1:
                 pass
             else:
-                name += str(token)
+                name += "%s " % str(token)
         return names
 
     def _parsefunction(self,indent):
@@ -495,16 +508,26 @@ class PyParser:
                 #Handle 'self' params
                 if scp.parent != None and type(scp.parent) == Class:
                     slice = 1
-                    p = scp.params[0]
-                    i = p.find('=')
-                    if i != -1: p = p[:i]
                     newscope.local('%s = %s' % (scp.params[0],scp.parent.name))
                 for p in scp.params[slice:]:
                     i = p.find('=')
+                    if len(p) == 0: continue
+                    pvar = ''
+                    ptype = ''
                     if i == -1:
-                        newscope.local('%s = _PyCmplNoType()' % p)
+                        pvar = p
+                        ptype = '_PyCmplNoType()'
                     else:
-                        newscope.local('%s = %s' % (p[:i],_sanitize(p[i+1])))
+                        pvar = p[:i]
+                        ptype = _sanitize(p[i+1:])
+                    if pvar.startswith('**'):
+                        pvar = pvar[2:]
+                        ptype = '{}'
+                    elif pvar.startswith('*'):
+                        pvar = pvar[1:]
+                        ptype = '[]'
+
+                    newscope.local('%s = %s' % (pvar,ptype))
 
             for s in scp.subscopes:
                 ns = s.copy_decl(0)
@@ -532,17 +555,19 @@ class PyParser:
                     self.scope = self.scope.pop(indent)
                 elif token == 'def':
                     func = self._parsefunction(indent)
-                    if func == None:
+                    if func is None:
                         print "function: syntax error..."
                         continue
+                    dbg("new scope: function")
                     freshscope = True
                     self.scope = self.scope.add(func)
                 elif token == 'class':
                     cls = self._parseclass(indent)
-                    if cls == None:
+                    if cls is None:
                         print "class: syntax error..."
                         continue
                     freshscope = True
+                    dbg("new scope: class")
                     self.scope = self.scope.add(cls)
                     
                 elif token == 'import':
@@ -569,6 +594,7 @@ class PyParser:
                     name,token = self._parsedotname(token) 
                     if token == '=':
                         stmt = self._parseassignment()
+                        dbg("parseassignment: %s = %s" % (name, stmt))
                         if stmt != None:
                             self.scope.local("%s = %s" % (name,stmt))
                     freshscope = False

runtime/autoload/rubycomplete.vim

@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:             Ruby
 " Maintainer:           Mark Guzman <segfault@hasno.info>
-" Info:                 $Id: rubycomplete.vim,v 1.41 2008/06/30 06:50:45 segy Exp $
+" Last Change:          2009 Sep 28
 " URL:                  http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
 " Anon CVS:             See above site
 " Release Coordinator:  Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
-" Maintainer Version:   0.8
+" Maintainer Version:   0.8.1
 " ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 "
 " Ruby IRB/Complete author: Keiju ISHITSUKA(keiju@ishitsuka.com)
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ class VimRubyCompletion
           ln = buf[x]
           if /^\s*(module|class|def|include)\s+/.match(ln)
             clscnt += 1 if $1 == "class"
-            #dprint "\$1: %s" % $1
+            #dprint "\$1$1
             classdef += "%s\n" % ln
             classdef += "end\n" if /def\s+/.match(ln)
             dprint ln
@@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ class VimRubyCompletion
         methods = Object.constants
         methods.grep(/^#{receiver}/).collect{|e| "::" + e}
 
-      when /^(((::)?[A-Z][^:.\(]*)+)::?([^:.]*)$/ # Constant or class methods
+      when /^(((::)?[A-Z][^:.\(]*)+?)::?([^:.]*)$/ # Constant or class methods
         receiver = $1
         message = Regexp.quote($4)
         dprint "const or cls 2 [recv: \'%s\', msg: \'%s\']" % [ receiver, message ]
@@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ class VimRubyCompletion
         dprint "global"
         methods = global_variables.grep(Regexp.new(Regexp.quote($1)))
 
-      when /^((\.?[^.]+)+)\.([^.]*)$/ # variable
+      when /^((\.?[^.]+)+?)\.([^.]*)$/ # variable
         dprint "variable"
         receiver = $1
         message = Regexp.quote($3)

runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim

@@ -1,16 +1,44 @@
 " Vim OMNI completion script for SQL
 " Language:    SQL
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
-" Version:     7.0
-" Last Change: 2009 Jan 04
+" Version:     10.0
+" Last Change: 2010 Jun 11
 " Usage:       For detailed help
 "              ":help sql.txt" 
 "              or ":help ft-sql-omni" 
 "              or read $VIMRUNTIME/doc/sql.txt
 
 " History
+" Version 10.0
+"     Updated PreCacheSyntax() 
+"         - Now returns a List of the syntax items it finds.
+"           This allows other plugins / scripts to use this list for their own
+"           purposes.  In this case XPTemplate can use them for a Choose list.
+"         - Verifies the parameters are the correct type and displays a
+"           warning if not.
+"         - Verifies the parameters are the correct type and displays a
+"           warning if not.
+"     Updated SQLCWarningMsg() 
+"         - Prepends warning message with SQLComplete so you know who issued
+"           the warning.
+"     Updated SQLCErrorMsg() 
+"         - Prepends error message with SQLComplete so you know who issued
+"           the error.
+"     
+" Version 9.0
+"     This change removes some of the support for tables with spaces in their
+"     names in order to simplify the regexes used to pull out query table 
+"     aliases for more robust table name and column name code completion.
+"     Full support for "table names with spaces" can be added in again
+"     after 7.3.
+"
+" Version 8.0
+"     Incorrectly re-executed the g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right and g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left 
+"     when drilling in and out of a column list for a table.
+"
 " Version 7.0
 "     Better handling of object names
+"
 " Version 6.0
 "     Supports object names with spaces "my table name"
 "
@@ -28,7 +56,7 @@ endif
 if exists('g:loaded_sql_completion')
     finish 
 endif
-let g:loaded_sql_completion = 70
+let g:loaded_sql_completion = 100
 
 " Maintains filename of dictionary
 let s:sql_file_table        = ""
@@ -250,7 +278,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
             "    1.  Check if the dbext plugin has the option turned
             "        on to even allow owners
             "    2.  Based on 1, if the user is showing a table list
-            "        and the DrillIntoTable (using <C-Right>) then 
+            "        and the DrillIntoTable (using <Right>) then 
             "        this will be owner.table.  In this case, we can
             "        check to see the table.column exists in the 
             "        cached table list.  If it does, then we have
@@ -354,7 +382,13 @@ endfunc
 
 function! sqlcomplete#PreCacheSyntax(...)
     let syn_group_arr = []
+    let syn_items     = []
+
     if a:0 > 0 
+        if type(a:1) != 3
+            call s:SQLCWarningMsg("Parameter is not a list. Example:['syntaxGroup1', 'syntaxGroup2']")
+            return ''
+        endif
         let syn_group_arr = a:1
     else
         let syn_group_arr = g:omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups
@@ -363,7 +397,36 @@ function! sqlcomplete#PreCacheSyntax(...)
     " the sytnax items.
     if !empty(syn_group_arr)
         for group_name in syn_group_arr
-            call s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(group_name)
+            let syn_items = extend( syn_items, s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(group_name) )
+        endfor
+    endif
+
+    return syn_items
+endfunction
+
+function! sqlcomplete#ResetCacheSyntax(...)
+    let syn_group_arr = []
+
+    if a:0 > 0 
+        if type(a:1) != 3
+            call s:SQLCWarningMsg("Parameter is not a list. Example:['syntaxGroup1', 'syntaxGroup2']")
+            return ''
+        endif
+        let syn_group_arr = a:1
+    else
+        let syn_group_arr = g:omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups
+    endif
+    " For each group specified in the list, precache all
+    " the sytnax items.
+    if !empty(syn_group_arr)
+        for group_name in syn_group_arr
+            let list_idx = index(s:syn_list, group_name, 0, &ignorecase)
+            if list_idx > -1
+                " Remove from list of groups
+                call remove( s:syn_list, list_idx )
+                " Remove from list of keywords
+                call remove( s:syn_value, list_idx )
+            endif
         endfor
     endif
 endfunction
@@ -390,13 +453,14 @@ function! sqlcomplete#DrillIntoTable()
         call sqlcomplete#Map('column')
         " C-Y, makes the currently highlighted entry active
         " and trigger the omni popup to be redisplayed
-        call feedkeys("\<C-Y>\<C-X>\<C-O>")
+        call feedkeys("\<C-Y>\<C-X>\<C-O>", 'n')
     else
-        if has('win32')
-            " If the popup is not visible, simple perform the normal
-            " <C-Right> behaviour
-            exec "normal! \<C-Right>"
-        endif
+	" If the popup is not visible, simple perform the normal
+	" key behaviour.
+	" Must use exec since they key must be preceeded by "\"
+	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string 
+	" rather than the "key press".
+        exec 'call feedkeys("\'.g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right.'", "n")'
     endif
     return ""
 endfunction
@@ -408,24 +472,25 @@ function! sqlcomplete#DrillOutOfColumns()
         " Trigger the omni popup to be redisplayed
         call feedkeys("\<C-X>\<C-O>")
     else
-        if has('win32')
-            " If the popup is not visible, simple perform the normal
-            " <C-Left> behaviour
-            exec "normal! \<C-Left>"
-        endif
+	" If the popup is not visible, simple perform the normal
+	" key behaviour.
+	" Must use exec since they key must be preceeded by "\"
+	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string 
+	" rather than the "key press".
+        exec 'call feedkeys("\'.g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left.'", "n")'
     endif
     return ""
 endfunction
 
 function! s:SQLCWarningMsg(msg)
     echohl WarningMsg
-    echomsg a:msg 
+    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg 
     echohl None
 endfunction
       
 function! s:SQLCErrorMsg(msg)
     echohl ErrorMsg
-    echomsg a:msg 
+    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg 
     echohl None
 endfunction
       
@@ -451,7 +516,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(syn_group)
             let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = syn_group
         endif
         let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql = ''
-        let syn_value                       = OmniSyntaxList()
+        let syn_value                       = syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
         let g:omni_syntax_group_include_sql = s:save_inc
         let g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql = s:save_exc
         " Cache these values for later use
@@ -609,7 +674,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
          " Search backwards to the beginning of the statement
          " and do NOT wrap
          " exec 'silent! normal! v?\<\(select\|update\|delete\|;\)\>'."\n".'"yy'
-         exec 'silent! normal! ?\<\(select\|update\|delete\|;\)\>'."\n"
+         exec 'silent! normal! ?\<\c\(select\|update\|delete\|;\)\>'."\n"
 
          " Start characterwise visual mode
          " Advance right one character
@@ -618,27 +683,38 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
          "     2.  A ; at the end of a line (the delimiter)
          "     3.  The end of the file (incase no delimiter)
          " Yank the visually selected text into the "y register.
-         exec 'silent! normal! vl/\(\<select\>\|\<update\>\|\<delete\>\|;\s*$\|\%$\)'."\n".'"yy'
+         exec 'silent! normal! vl/\c\(\<select\>\|\<update\>\|\<delete\>\|;\s*$\|\%$\)'."\n".'"yy'
 
          let query = @y
          let query = substitute(query, "\n", ' ', 'g')
          let found = 0
 
-         " if query =~? '^\(select\|update\|delete\)'
-         if query =~? '^\(select\)'
+         " if query =~? '^\c\(select\)'
+         if query =~? '^\(select\|update\|delete\)'
              let found = 1
              "  \(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?   - 
-             " 'from.\{-}'  - Starting at the from clause
+             " '\c\(from\|join\|,\).\{-}'  - Starting at the from clause (case insensitive)
              " '\zs\(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?' - Get the owner name (optional)
              " '\<\w\+\>\ze' - Get the table name 
              " '\s\+\<'.table_name.'\>' - Followed by the alias
              " '\s*\.\@!.*'  - Cannot be followed by a .
              " '\(\<where\>\|$\)' - Must be followed by a WHERE clause
              " '.*'  - Exclude the rest of the line in the match
+             " let table_name_new = matchstr(@y, 
+             "             \ '\c\(from\|join\|,\).\{-}'.
+             "             \ '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?.\{-}\("\|\]\)\.\)\?'.
+             "             \ '\("\|\[\)\?.\{-}\("\|\]\)\?\ze'.
+             "             \ '\s\+\%(as\s\+\)\?\<'.
+             "             \ matchstr(table_name, '.\{-}\ze\.\?$').
+             "             \ '\>'.
+             "             \ '\s*\.\@!.*'.
+             "             \ '\(\<where\>\|$\)'.
+             "             \ '.*'
+             "             \ )
              let table_name_new = matchstr(@y, 
-                         \ 'from.\{-}'.
-                         \ '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?.\{-}\("\|\]\)\.\)\?'.
-                         \ '\("\|\[\)\?.\{-}\("\|\]\)\ze'.
+                         \ '\c\(\<from\>\|\<join\>\|,\)\s*'.
+                         \ '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\.\)\?'.
+                         \ '\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\ze'.
                          \ '\s\+\%(as\s\+\)\?\<'.
                          \ matchstr(table_name, '.\{-}\ze\.\?$').
                          \ '\>'.
@@ -649,7 +725,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
 
              if table_name_new != ''
                  let table_alias = table_name
-                 let table_name  = table_name_new
+                 let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze' )
 
                  let list_idx = index(s:tbl_name, table_name, 0, &ignorecase)
                  if list_idx > -1
@@ -717,4 +793,3 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
 
     return table_cols
 endfunction
-

runtime/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim

@@ -1,10 +1,35 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:    All languages, uses existing syntax highlighting rules
-" Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn.vim@gmail.com>
-" Version:     4.0
-" Last Change: Fri 26 Oct 2007 05:27:03 PM Eastern Daylight Time
+" Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
+" Version:     7.0
+" Last Change: 2010 Jul 29
 " Usage:       For detailed help, ":help ft-syntax-omni" 
 
+" History
+"
+" Version 7.0
+"     Updated syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
+"         - Looking up the syntax groups defined from a syntax file
+"           looked for only 1 format of {filetype}GroupName, but some 
+"           syntax writers use this format as well:
+"               {b:current_syntax}GroupName
+"           OmniSyntaxList() will now check for both if the first
+"           method does not find a match.
+"
+" Version 6.0
+"     Added syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
+"         - Allows other plugins to use this for their own 
+"           purposes.
+"         - It will return a List of all syntax items for the
+"           syntax group name passed in.  
+"         - XPTemplate for SQL will use this function via the 
+"           sqlcomplete plugin to populate a Choose box.
+"
+" Version 5.0
+"     Updated SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems()
+"         - When processing a list of syntax groups, the final group
+"           was missed in function SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems.
+"
 " Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
 " This check is in place in case this script is
 " sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature. 
@@ -19,7 +44,7 @@ endif
 if exists('g:loaded_syntax_completion')
     finish 
 endif
-let g:loaded_syntax_completion = 40
+let g:loaded_syntax_completion = 70
 
 " Set ignorecase to the ftplugin standard
 " This is the default setting, but if you define a buffer local
@@ -123,7 +148,30 @@ function! syntaxcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
     return compl_list
 endfunc
 
-function! OmniSyntaxList()
+function! syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList(...)
+    if a:0 > 0
+        let parms = []
+        if 3 == type(a:1) 
+            let parms = a:1
+        elseif 1 == type(a:1)
+            let parms = split(a:1, ',')
+        endif
+        return OmniSyntaxList( parms )
+    else
+        return OmniSyntaxList()
+    endif
+endfunc
+
+function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
+    let list_parms = []
+    if a:0 > 0
+        if 3 == type(a:1) 
+            let list_parms = a:1
+        elseif 1 == type(a:1)
+            let list_parms = split(a:1, ',')
+        endif
+    endif
+
     " Default to returning a dictionary, if use_dictionary is set to 0
     " a list will be returned.
     " let use_dictionary = 1
@@ -152,16 +200,40 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList()
     endif
 
     let saveL = @l
+    let filetype = substitute(&filetype, '\.', '_', 'g')
     
+    if empty(list_parms)
+        " Default the include group to include the requested syntax group
+        let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = ''
+        " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
+        if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_'.filetype)
+            let syntax_group_include_{filetype} =
+                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+            let list_parms = split(g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype}, ',')
+            if syntax_group_include_{filetype} =~ '\w'
+                let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = 
+                            \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{filetype}, 
+                            \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
+                            \ )
+            endif
+        endif
+    else
+        " A specific list was provided, use it
+    endif
+
     " Loop through all the syntax groupnames, and build a
     " syntax file which contains these names.  This can 
     " work generically for any filetype that does not already
     " have a plugin defined.
     " This ASSUMES the syntax groupname BEGINS with the name
     " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\syntax 
-    " directory.
+    " directory this is true for almost all syntax definitions.
+    " As an example, the SQL syntax groups have this pattern:
+    "     sqlType
+    "     sqlOperators
+    "     sqlKeyword ...
     redir @l
-    silent! exec 'syntax list '
+    silent! exec 'syntax list '.join(list_parms)
     redir END
 
     let syntax_full = "\n".@l
@@ -176,31 +248,23 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList()
 
     let filetype = substitute(&filetype, '\.', '_', 'g')
 
-    " Default the include group to include the requested syntax group
-    let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = ''
-    " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
-    if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_'.filetype)
-        let syntax_group_include_{filetype} =
-                    \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
-        if syntax_group_include_{filetype} =~ '\w'
-            let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = 
-                        \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{filetype}, 
-                        \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
-                        \ )
-        endif
-    endif
-
-    " Default the exclude group to nothing
-    let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = ''
-    " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
-    if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_'.filetype)
-        let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =
-                    \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
-        if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =~ '\w' 
-            let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = 
-                        \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, 
-                        \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
-                        \ )
+    let list_exclude_groups = []
+    if a:0 > 0 
+        " Do nothing since we have specific a specific list of groups
+    else
+        " Default the exclude group to nothing
+        let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = ''
+        " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
+        if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_'.filetype)
+            let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =
+                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+            let list_exclude_groups = split(g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, ',')
+            if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =~ '\w' 
+                let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = 
+                            \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, 
+                            \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
+                            \ )
+            endif
         endif
     endif
 
@@ -225,47 +289,51 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList()
         let index    = 0
         let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
 
+        if index == -1 && exists('b:current_syntax') && ft_part_name != b:current_syntax
+            " There appears to be two standards when writing syntax files.
+            " Either items begin as:
+            "     syn keyword {filetype}Keyword         values ...
+            "     let b:current_syntax = "sql"
+            "     let b:current_syntax = "sqlanywhere"
+            " Or
+            "     syn keyword {syntax_filename}Keyword  values ...
+            "     let b:current_syntax = "mysql"
+            " So, we will make the format of finding the syntax group names
+            " a bit more flexible and look for both if the first fails to 
+            " find a match.
+            let next_group_regex = '\n' .
+                        \ '\zs'.b:current_syntax.'\w\+\ze'.
+                        \ '\s\+xxx\s\+' 
+            let index    = 0
+            let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
+        endif
+
         while index > -1
             let group_name = matchstr( syntax_full, '\w\+', index )
 
             let get_syn_list = 1
-            " if syntax_group_include_{&filetype} == ''
-            "     if syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype} != ''
-            "         if '\<'.syntax_group_exclude_{&filetype}.'\>' =~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+            for exclude_group_name in list_exclude_groups
+                if '\<'.exclude_group_name.'\>' =~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
+                    let get_syn_list = 0
+                endif
+            endfor
+        
+            " This code is no longer needed in version 6.0 since we have
+            " augmented the syntax list command to only retrieve the syntax 
+            " groups we are interested in.
+            "
+            " if get_syn_list == 1
+            "     if syntax_group_include_{filetype} != ''
+            "         if '\<'.syntax_group_include_{filetype}.'\>' !~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
             "             let get_syn_list = 0
             "         endif
             "     endif
-            " else
-            "     if '\<'.syntax_group_include_{&filetype}.'\>' !~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
-            "         let get_syn_list = 0
-            "     endif
             " endif
-            if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} != ''
-                if '\<'.syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}.'\>' =~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
-                    let get_syn_list = 0
-                endif
-            endif
-        
-            if get_syn_list == 1
-                if syntax_group_include_{filetype} != ''
-                    if '\<'.syntax_group_include_{filetype}.'\>' !~ '\<'.group_name.'\>'
-                        let get_syn_list = 0
-                    endif
-                endif
-            endif
 
             if get_syn_list == 1
                 " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we 
                 " are interested in.
                 let extra_syn_list = s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems(group_name, syntax_full)
-
-                " if !empty(extra_syn_list)
-                "     for elem in extra_syn_list
-                "         let item = {'word':elem, 'kind':'t', 'info':group_name}
-                "         let compl_list += [item]
-                "     endfor
-                " endif
-
                 let syn_list = syn_list . extra_syn_list . "\n"
             endif
 
@@ -312,9 +380,13 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
     "     \zs          - start the match
     "     .\{-}        - everything ...
     "     \ze          - end the match
+    "     \(           - start a group or 2 potential matches
     "     \n\w         - at the first newline starting with a character
+    "     \|           - 2nd potential match
+    "     \%$          - matches end of the file or string
+    "     \)           - end a group
     let syntax_group = matchstr(a:syntax_full, 
-                \ "\n".a:group_name.'\s\+xxx\s\+\zs.\{-}\ze'."\n".'\w'
+                \ "\n".a:group_name.'\s\+xxx\s\+\zs.\{-}\ze\(\n\w\|\%$\)'
                 \ )
 
     if syntax_group != ""

runtime/autoload/tar.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " tar.vim: Handles browsing tarfiles
 "            AUTOLOAD PORTION
-" Date:			Dec 28, 2009
-" Version:		24
+" Date:			Aug 09, 2010
+" Version:		26
 " Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
 " License:		Vim License  (see vim's :help license)
 "
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_tar")
  finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_tar= "v24"
+let g:loaded_tar= "v26"
 if v:version < 702
  echohl WarningMsg
  echo "***warning*** this version of tar needs vim 7.2"
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
   if &ma != 1
    set ma
   endif
-  let w:tarfile= a:tarfile
+  let b:tarfile= a:tarfile
 
   setlocal noswapfile
   setlocal buftype=nofile
@@ -164,6 +164,9 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
   elseif tarfile =~# '\.lzma$'
 "   call Decho("3: exe silent r! lzma -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
    exe "silent r! lzma -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.\(xz\|txz\)$'
+"   call Decho("3: exe silent r! xz --decompress --stdout -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
+   exe "silent r! xz --decompress --stdout -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
   else
    if tarfile =~ '^\s*-'
     " A file name starting with a dash is taken as an option.  Prepend ./ to avoid that.
@@ -195,13 +198,13 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
   noremap <silent> <buffer> <cr> :call <SID>TarBrowseSelect()<cr>
 
   let &report= repkeep
-"  call Dret("tar#Browse : w:tarfile<".w:tarfile.">")
+"  call Dret("tar#Browse : b:tarfile<".b:tarfile.">")
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " TarBrowseSelect: {{{2
 fun! s:TarBrowseSelect()
-"  call Dfunc("TarBrowseSelect() w:tarfile<".w:tarfile."> curfile<".expand("%").">")
+"  call Dfunc("TarBrowseSelect() b:tarfile<".b:tarfile."> curfile<".expand("%").">")
   let repkeep= &report
   set report=10
   let fname= getline(".")
@@ -221,8 +224,8 @@ fun! s:TarBrowseSelect()
    return
   endif
 
-  " about to make a new window, need to use w:tarfile
-  let tarfile= w:tarfile
+  " about to make a new window, need to use b:tarfile
+  let tarfile= b:tarfile
   let curfile= expand("%")
   if has("win32") && executable("cygpath")
    " assuming cygwin
@@ -265,10 +268,13 @@ fun! tar#Read(fname,mode)
   elseif  fname =~ '\.lzma$' && executable("lzcat")
    let decmp= "|lzcat"
    let doro = 1
+  elseif  fname =~ '\.xz$' && executable("xzcat")
+   let decmp= "|xzcat"
+   let doro = 1
   else
    let decmp=""
    let doro = 0
-   if fname =~ '\.bz2$\|\.gz$\|\.lzma$\|\.zip$\|\.Z$'
+   if fname =~ '\.bz2$\|\.gz$\|\.lzma$\|\.xz$\|\.zip$\|\.Z$'
     setlocal bin
    endif
   endif
@@ -290,6 +296,9 @@ fun! tar#Read(fname,mode)
   elseif tarfile =~# '\.lzma$'
 "   call Decho("7: exe silent r! lzma -d -c ".shellescape(tarfile,1)."| ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_readoptions." - ".tar_secure.shellescape(fname,1).decmp)
    exe "silent r! lzma -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)."| ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_readoptions." - ".tar_secure.shellescape(fname,1).decmp
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.\(xz\|txz\)$'
+"   call Decho("3: exe silent r! xz --decompress --stdout -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_readoptions." - ".tar_secure.shellescape(fname,1).decmp)
+   exe "silent r! xz --decompress --stdout -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_readoptions." - ".tar_secure.shellescape(fname,1).decmp
   else
    if tarfile =~ '^\s*-'
     " A file name starting with a dash is taken as an option.  Prepend ./ to avoid that.
@@ -304,7 +313,7 @@ fun! tar#Read(fname,mode)
    setlocal ro
   endif
 
-  let w:tarfile= a:fname
+  let b:tarfile= a:fname
   exe "file tarfile::".fnameescape(fname)
 
   " cleanup
@@ -312,13 +321,13 @@ fun! tar#Read(fname,mode)
   set nomod
 
   let &report= repkeep
-"  call Dret("tar#Read : w:tarfile<".w:tarfile.">")
+"  call Dret("tar#Read : b:tarfile<".b:tarfile.">")
 endfun
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " tar#Write: {{{2
 fun! tar#Write(fname)
-"  call Dfunc("tar#Write(fname<".a:fname.">) w:tarfile<".w:tarfile."> tblfile_".winnr()."<".s:tblfile_{winnr()}.">")
+"  call Dfunc("tar#Write(fname<".a:fname.">) b:tarfile<".b:tarfile."> tblfile_".winnr()."<".s:tblfile_{winnr()}.">")
   let repkeep= &report
   set report=10
 
@@ -374,8 +383,8 @@ fun! tar#Write(fname)
   cd _ZIPVIM_
 "  call Decho("current directory now: ".getcwd())
 
-  let tarfile = substitute(w:tarfile,'tarfile:\(.\{-}\)::.*$','\1','')
-  let fname   = substitute(w:tarfile,'tarfile:.\{-}::\(.*\)$','\1','')
+  let tarfile = substitute(b:tarfile,'tarfile:\(.\{-}\)::.*$','\1','')
+  let fname   = substitute(b:tarfile,'tarfile:.\{-}::\(.*\)$','\1','')
 
   " handle compressed archives
   if tarfile =~# '\.bz2'
@@ -387,17 +396,22 @@ fun! tar#Write(fname)
    call system("gzip -d -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0))
    let tarfile = substitute(tarfile,'\.gz','','e')
    let compress= "gzip -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0)
-"   call Decho("compress<".compress.">")
-  elseif tarfile =~# '\.lzma'
-   call system("lzma -d -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0))
-   let tarfile = substitute(tarfile,'\.lzma','','e')
-   let compress= "lzma -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0)
 "   call Decho("compress<".compress.">")
   elseif tarfile =~# '\.tgz'
    call system("gzip -d -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0))
    let tarfile = substitute(tarfile,'\.tgz','.tar','e')
    let compress= "gzip -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0)
    let tgz     = 1
+"   call Decho("compress<".compress.">")
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.xz'
+   call system("xz -d -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0))
+   let tarfile = substitute(tarfile,'\.xz','','e')
+   let compress= "xz -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0)
+"   call Decho("compress<".compress.">")
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.lzma'
+   call system("lzma -d -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0))
+   let tarfile = substitute(tarfile,'\.lzma','','e')
+   let compress= "lzma -- ".shellescape(tarfile,0)
 "   call Decho("compress<".compress.">")
   endif
 "  call Decho("tarfile<".tarfile.">")

runtime/autoload/tohtml.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,378 @@
+" Vim autoload file for the tohtml plugin.
+" Maintainer: Ben Fritz <fritzophrenic@gmail.com>
+" Last Change: 2010 Aug 12
+"
+" Additional contributors:
+"
+"	      Original by Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+"	      Diff2HTML() added by Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
+"
+"	      See Mercurial change logs for more!
+
+" this file uses line continuations
+let s:cpo_sav = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+func! tohtml#Convert2HTML(line1, line2)
+  let s:settings = tohtml#GetUserSettings()
+
+  if !&diff || s:settings.diff_one_file
+    if a:line2 >= a:line1
+      let g:html_start_line = a:line1
+      let g:html_end_line = a:line2
+    else
+      let g:html_start_line = a:line2
+      let g:html_end_line = a:line1
+    endif
+    runtime syntax/2html.vim
+  else
+    let win_list = []
+    let buf_list = []
+    windo | if &diff | call add(win_list, winbufnr(0)) | endif
+    let s:settings.whole_filler = 1
+    let g:html_diff_win_num = 0
+    for window in win_list
+      exe ":" . bufwinnr(window) . "wincmd w"
+      let g:html_start_line = 1
+      let g:html_end_line = line('$')
+      let g:html_diff_win_num += 1
+      runtime syntax/2html.vim
+      call add(buf_list, bufnr('%'))
+    endfor
+    unlet g:html_diff_win_num
+    call tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list)
+  endif
+
+  unlet g:html_start_line
+  unlet g:html_end_line
+  unlet s:settings
+endfunc
+
+func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list)
+  let xml_line = ""
+  let tag_close = '>'
+
+  let s:old_paste = &paste
+  set paste
+  let s:old_magic = &magic
+  set magic
+
+  if s:settings.use_xhtml
+    if s:settings.encoding != ""
+      let xml_line = "<?xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"" . s:settings.encoding . "\"?>"
+    else
+      let xml_line = "<?xml version=\"1.0\"?>"
+    endif
+    let tag_close = ' />'
+  endif
+
+  let style = [s:settings.use_xhtml ? "" : '-->']
+  let body_line = ''
+
+  let html = []
+  if s:settings.use_xhtml
+    call add(html, xml_line)
+  endif
+  if s:settings.use_xhtml
+    call add(html, "<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN\" \"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd\">")
+    call add(html, '<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">')
+  elseif s:settings.use_css && !s:settings.no_pre
+    call add(html, "<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN\" \"http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd\">")
+    call add(html, '<html>')
+  else
+    call add(html, '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"')
+    call add(html, '  "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">')
+    call add(html, '<html>')
+  endif
+  call add(html, '<head>')
+
+  " include encoding as close to the top as possible, but only if not already
+  " contained in XML information (to avoid haggling over content type)
+  if s:settings.encoding != "" && !s:settings.use_xhtml
+    call add(html, "<meta http-equiv=\"content-type\" content=\"text/html; charset=" . s:settings.encoding . '"' . tag_close)
+  endif
+
+  call add(html, '<title>diff</title>')
+  call add(html, '<meta name="Generator" content="Vim/'.v:version/100.'.'.v:version%100.'"'.tag_close)
+  call add(html, '<meta name="plugin-version" content="'.g:loaded_2html_plugin.'"'.tag_close)
+  call add(html, '<meta name="settings" content="'.
+	\ join(filter(keys(s:settings),'s:settings[v:val]'),',').
+	\ '"'.tag_close)
+
+  call add(html, '</head>')
+  let body_line_num = len(html)
+  call add(html, '<body>')
+  call add(html, '<table border="1" width="100%">')
+
+  call add(html, '<tr>')
+  for buf in a:win_list
+    call add(html, '<th>'.bufname(buf).'</th>')
+  endfor
+  call add(html, '</tr><tr>')
+
+  let diff_style_start = 0
+  let insert_index = 0
+
+  for buf in a:buf_list
+    let temp = []
+    exe bufwinnr(buf) . 'wincmd w'
+
+    " If text is folded because of user foldmethod settings, etc. we don't want
+    " to act on everything in a fold by mistake.
+    setlocal nofoldenable
+
+    " When not using CSS or when using xhtml, the <body> line can be important.
+    " Assume it will be the same for all buffers and grab it from the first
+    " buffer. Similarly, need to grab the body end line as well.
+    if body_line == ''
+      1
+      call search('<body')
+      let body_line = getline('.')
+      $
+      call search('</body>', 'b')
+      let s:body_end_line = getline('.')
+    endif
+
+    " Grab the style information.  Some of this will be duplicated...
+    1
+    let style_start = search('^<style type="text/css">')
+    1
+    let style_end = search('^</style>')
+    if style_start > 0 && style_end > 0
+      let buf_styles = getline(style_start + 1, style_end - 1)
+      for a_style in buf_styles
+	if index(style, a_style) == -1
+	  if diff_style_start == 0
+	    if a_style =~ '\<Diff\(Change\|Text\|Add\|Delete\)'
+	      let diff_style_start = len(style)-1
+	    endif
+	  endif
+	  call insert(style, a_style, insert_index)
+	  let insert_index += 1
+	endif
+      endfor
+    endif
+
+    if diff_style_start != 0
+      let insert_index = diff_style_start
+    endif
+
+    " Delete those parts that are not needed so
+    " we can include the rest into the resulting table
+    1,/^<body/d_
+    $
+    ?</body>?,$d_
+    let temp = getline(1,'$')
+    " undo deletion of start and end part
+    " so we can later save the file as valid html
+    " TODO: restore using grabbed lines if undolevel is 1?
+    normal 2u
+    if s:settings.use_css
+      call add(html, '<td valign="top"><div>')
+    elseif s:settings.use_xhtml
+      call add(html, '<td nowrap="nowrap" valign="top"><div>')
+    else
+      call add(html, '<td nowrap valign="top"><div>')
+    endif
+    let html += temp
+    call add(html, '</div></td>')
+
+    " Close this buffer
+    " TODO: the comment above says we're going to allow saving the file
+    " later...but here we discard it?
+    quit!
+  endfor
+
+  let html[body_line_num] = body_line
+
+  call add(html, '</tr>')
+  call add(html, '</table>')
+  call add(html, s:body_end_line)
+  call add(html, '</html>')
+
+  let i = 1
+  let name = "Diff" . (s:settings.use_xhtml ? ".xhtml" : ".html")
+  " Find an unused file name if current file name is already in use
+  while filereadable(name)
+    let name = substitute(name, '\d*\.x\?html$', '', '') . i . '.' . fnamemodify(copy(name), ":t:e")
+    let i += 1
+  endwhile
+  exe "topleft new " . name
+  setlocal modifiable
+
+  " just in case some user autocmd creates content in the new buffer, make sure
+  " it is empty before proceeding
+  %d
+  call append(0, html)
+
+  if len(style) > 0
+    1
+    let style_start = search('^</head>')-1
+
+    " Insert javascript to toggle matching folds open and closed in all windows,
+    " if dynamic folding is active.
+    if s:settings.dynamic_folds
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \  "<script type='text/javascript'>",
+	    \  s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//<![CDATA[' : "  <!--",
+	    \  "  function toggleFold(objID)",
+	    \  "  {",
+	    \  "    for (win_num = 1; win_num <= ".len(a:buf_list)."; win_num++)",
+	    \  "    {",
+	    \  "      var fold;",
+	    \  '      fold = document.getElementById("win"+win_num+objID);',
+	    \  "      if(fold.className == 'closed-fold')",
+	    \  "      {",
+	    \  "        fold.className = 'open-fold';",
+	    \  "      }",
+	    \  "      else if (fold.className == 'open-fold')",
+	    \  "      {",
+	    \  "        fold.className = 'closed-fold';",
+	    \  "      }",
+	    \  "    }",
+	    \  "  }",
+	    \  s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//]]>' : "  -->",
+	    \  "</script>"
+	    \ ])
+    endif
+
+    " Insert styles from all the generated html documents and additional styles
+    " for the table-based layout of the side-by-side diff. The diff should take
+    " up the full browser window (but not more), and be static in size,
+    " horizontally scrollable when the lines are too long. Otherwise, the diff
+    " is pretty useless for really long lines.
+    if s:settings.use_css
+      call append(style_start,
+	    \ ['<style type="text/css">']+
+	    \ style+
+	    \ [ s:settings.use_xhtml ? '' : '<!--',
+	    \   'table { table-layout: fixed; }',
+	    \   'html, body, table, tbody { width: 100%; margin: 0; padding: 0; }',
+	    \   'th, td { width: '.printf("%.1f",100.0/len(a:win_list)).'%; }',
+	    \   'td div { overflow: auto; }',
+	    \   s:settings.use_xhtml ? '' : '-->',
+	    \   '</style>'
+	    \ ])
+    endif
+  endif
+
+  let &paste = s:old_paste
+  let &magic = s:old_magic
+endfunc
+
+" Gets a single user option and sets it in the passed-in Dict, or gives it the
+" default value if the option doesn't actually exist.
+func! tohtml#GetOption(settings, option, default)
+  if exists('g:html_'.a:option)
+    let a:settings[a:option] = g:html_{a:option}
+  else
+    let a:settings[a:option] = a:default
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+" returns a Dict containing the values of all user options for 2html, including
+" default values for those not given an explicit value by the user. Discards the
+" html_ prefix of the option for nicer looking code.
+func! tohtml#GetUserSettings()
+  if exists('s:settings')
+    " just restore the known options if we've already retrieved them
+    return s:settings
+  else
+    " otherwise figure out which options are set
+    let user_settings = {}
+
+    " Define the correct option if the old option name exists and we haven't
+    " already defined the correct one. Maybe I'll put out a warnig message about
+    " this sometime and remove the old option entirely at some even later time,
+    " but for now just silently accept the old option.
+    if exists('g:use_xhtml') && !exists("g:html_use_xhtml")
+      let g:html_use_xhtml = g:use_xhtml
+    endif
+
+    " get current option settings with appropriate defaults
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,    'no_progress',  !has("statusline") )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'diff_one_file',  0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'number_lines',  &number )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,        'use_css',  1 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings, 'ignore_conceal',  0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings, 'ignore_folding',  0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'dynamic_folds',  0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'no_foldcolumn',  0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'hover_unfold',  0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,         'no_pre',  0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'whole_filler',  0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,      'use_xhtml',  0 )
+    
+    " override those settings that need it
+
+    " hover opening implies dynamic folding
+    if user_settings.hover_unfold
+      let user_settings.dynamic_folds = 1
+    endif
+
+    " ignore folding overrides dynamic folding
+    if user_settings.ignore_folding && user_settings.dynamic_folds
+      let user_settings.dynamic_folds = 0
+      let user_settings.hover_unfold = 0
+    endif
+
+    " dynamic folding with no foldcolumn implies hover opens
+    if user_settings.dynamic_folds && user_settings.no_foldcolumn
+      let user_settings.hover_unfold = 1
+    endif
+
+    " dynamic folding implies css
+    if user_settings.dynamic_folds
+      let user_settings.use_css = 1
+    endif
+
+    " if we're not using CSS we cannot use a pre section because <font> tags
+    " aren't allowed inside a <pre> block
+    if !user_settings.use_css
+      let user_settings.no_pre = 1
+    endif
+
+    " Figure out proper MIME charset from the 'encoding' option.
+    if exists("g:html_use_encoding")
+      let user_settings.encoding = g:html_use_encoding
+    else
+      let vim_encoding = &encoding
+      if vim_encoding =~ '^8bit\|^2byte'
+	let vim_encoding = substitute(vim_encoding, '^8bit-\|^2byte-', '', '')
+      endif
+      if vim_encoding == 'latin1'
+	let user_settings.encoding = 'iso-8859-1'
+      elseif vim_encoding =~ "^cp12"
+	let user_settings.encoding = substitute(vim_encoding, 'cp', 'windows-', '')
+      elseif vim_encoding == 'sjis' || vim_encoding == 'cp932'
+	let user_settings.encoding = 'Shift_JIS'
+      elseif vim_encoding == 'big5' || vim_encoding == 'cp950'
+	let user_settings.encoding = "Big5"
+      elseif vim_encoding == 'euc-cn'
+	let user_settings.encoding = 'GB_2312-80'
+      elseif vim_encoding == 'euc-tw'
+	let user_settings.encoding = ""
+      elseif vim_encoding =~ '^euc\|^iso\|^koi'
+	let user_settings.encoding = substitute(vim_encoding, '.*', '\U\0', '')
+      elseif vim_encoding == 'cp949'
+	let user_settings.encoding = 'KS_C_5601-1987'
+      elseif vim_encoding == 'cp936'
+	let user_settings.encoding = 'GBK'
+      elseif vim_encoding =~ '^ucs\|^utf'
+	let user_settings.encoding = 'UTF-8'
+      else
+	let user_settings.encoding = ""
+      endif
+    endif
+
+    " TODO: font
+
+    return user_settings
+  endif
+endfunc
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_sav
+unlet s:cpo_sav
+
+" Make sure any patches will probably use consistent indent
+"   vim: ts=8 sw=2 sts=2 noet

runtime/autoload/vimball.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " vimball.vim : construct a file containing both paths and files
 " Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-" Date:		Dec 28, 2009
-" Version:	30
+" Date:		Apr 12, 2010
+" Version:	31
 " GetLatestVimScripts: 1502 1 :AutoInstall: vimball.vim
 " Copyright: (c) 2004-2009 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
 "            The VIM LICENSE applies to Vimball.vim, and Vimball.txt
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_vimball")
  finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_vimball = "v30"
+let g:loaded_vimball = "v31"
 if v:version < 702
  echohl WarningMsg
  echo "***warning*** this version of vimball needs vim 7.2"

runtime/autoload/zip.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " zip.vim: Handles browsing zipfiles
 "            AUTOLOAD PORTION
-" Date:		Jul 30, 2008
-" Version:	22
+" Date:		Apr 12, 2010
+" Version:	23
 " Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
 " License:	Vim License  (see vim's :help license)
 " Copyright:    Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
@@ -16,13 +16,19 @@
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " Load Once: {{{1
-let s:keepcpo= &cpo
-set cpo&vim
-if &cp || exists("g:loaded_zip") || v:version < 700
+if &cp || exists("g:loaded_zip")
  finish
 endif
+let g:loaded_zip= "v23"
+if v:version < 702
+ echohl WarningMsg
+ echo "***warning*** this version of zip needs vim 7.2"
+ echohl Normal
+ finish
+endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim
 
-let g:loaded_zip     = "v22"
 let s:zipfile_escape = ' ?&;\'
 let s:ERROR          = 2
 let s:WARNING        = 1

runtime/compiler/cucumber.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:	Cucumber
+" Maintainer:	Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
+" Last Change:	2010 Aug 09
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "cucumber"
+
+if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
+  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
+endif
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+CompilerSet makeprg=cucumber
+
+CompilerSet errorformat=
+      \%W%m\ (Cucumber::Undefined),
+      \%E%m\ (%.%#),
+      \%Z%f:%l,
+      \%Z%f:%l:%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim:set sw=2 sts=2:

runtime/compiler/eruby.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Language:		eRuby
 " Maintainer:		Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
-" Info:			$Id: eruby.vim,v 1.7 2008/06/29 04:18:42 tpope Exp $
+" Last Change:		2008 Aug 1
 " URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
 " Anon CVS:		See above site
 " Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>

runtime/compiler/gcc.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:         GNU C Compiler
 " Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:  2009-05-01
+" Latest Revision:  2010-10-14
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish
@@ -18,7 +18,11 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
       \\"%f\"%*\\D%l:\ %m,
       \%-G%f:%l:\ %trror:\ (Each\ undeclared\ identifier\ is\ reported\ only\ once,
       \%-G%f:%l:\ %trror:\ for\ each\ function\ it\ appears\ in.),
+      \%f:%l:%c:\ %trror:\ %m,
+      \%f:%l:%c:\ %tarning:\ %m,
       \%f:%l:%c:\ %m,
+      \%f:%l:\ %trror:\ %m,
+      \%f:%l:\ %tarning:\ %m,
       \%f:%l:\ %m,
       \\"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l%*\\D%c%*[^\ ]\ %m,
       \%D%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Entering\ directory\ `%f',

runtime/compiler/perl.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim Compiler File
 " Compiler:     Perl syntax checks (perl -Wc)
-" Maintainer:   Christian J. Robinson <infynity@onewest.net>
+" Maintainer:   Christian J. Robinson <heptite@gmail.com>
 " Last Change:  2006 Aug 13
 
 if exists("current_compiler")

runtime/compiler/rspec.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Language:		RSpec
-" Maintainer:		Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.info>
-" Info:			$Id: rspec.vim,v 1.2 2008/06/29 04:18:42 tpope Exp $
+" Maintainer:		Tim Pope <vimNOSPAM@tpope.org>
+" Last Change:		2009 Dec 22
 " URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
 " Anon CVS:		See above site
 " Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>

runtime/compiler/ruby.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:		Ruby
 " Function:		Syntax check and/or error reporting
 " Maintainer:		Tim Hammerquist <timh at rubyforge.org>
-" Info:			$Id: ruby.vim,v 1.13 2008/06/29 04:18:43 tpope Exp $
+" Last Change:		2008 Aug 1
 " URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
 " Anon CVS:		See above site
 " Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>

runtime/compiler/rubyunit.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Language:		Test::Unit - Ruby Unit Testing Framework
 " Maintainer:		Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>
-" Info:			$Id: rubyunit.vim,v 1.12 2008/06/29 04:18:43 tpope Exp $
+" Last Change:		2008 Aug 1
 " URL:			http://vim-ruby.rubyforge.org
 " Anon CVS:		See above site
 " Release Coordinator:	Doug Kearns <dougkearns@gmail.com>

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -37,8 +37,10 @@ DOCS = \
 	hangulin.txt \
 	hebrew.txt \
 	help.txt \
+	helphelp.txt \
 	howto.txt \
 	if_cscop.txt \
+	if_lua.txt \
 	if_mzsch.txt \
 	if_ole.txt \
 	if_perl.txt \
@@ -167,8 +169,10 @@ HTMLS = \
 	gui_x11.html \
 	hangulin.html \
 	hebrew.html \
+	helphelp.html \
 	howto.html \
 	if_cscop.html \
+	if_lua.html \
 	if_mzsch.html \
 	if_ole.html \
 	if_perl.html \
@@ -336,12 +340,14 @@ uganda.nsis.txt: uganda.txt
 		uganda.txt | uniq >uganda.nsis.txt
 
 # Awk version of .txt to .html conversion.
-html: noerrors tags tags.ref $(HTMLS)
+html: noerrors tags $(HTMLS)
 	@if test -f errors.log; then more errors.log; fi
 
 noerrors:
 	-rm -f errors.log
 
+$(HTMLS): tags.ref
+
 .txt.html:
 	$(AWK) -f makehtml.awk $< >$@
 

runtime/doc/arabic.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*arabic.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*arabic.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Nadim Shaikli
@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ o  Keyboard
    +  CTRL-^ in insert/replace mode toggles between Arabic/Latin mode
 
    +  Keyboard mapping is based on the Microsoft's Arabic keymap (the
-      defacto standard in the Arab world):
+      de facto standard in the Arab world):
 
   +---------------------------------------------------------------------+
   |!   |@   |#   |$   |%   |^   |&   |*   |(   |)   |_   |+   ||   |~  ّ |

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Nov 25
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 22
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -401,6 +401,8 @@ BufUnload			Before unloading a buffer.  This is when the
 				buffer being unloaded "<afile>".
 				Don't change to another buffer, it will cause
 				problems.
+				When exiting and v:dying is 2 or more this
+				event is not triggered.
 							*BufWinEnter*
 BufWinEnter			After a buffer is displayed in a window.  This
 				can be when the buffer is loaded (after
@@ -422,6 +424,8 @@ BufWinLeave			Before a buffer is removed from a window.
 				NOTE: When this autocommand is executed, the
 				current buffer "%" may be different from the
 				buffer being unloaded "<afile>".
+				When exiting and v:dying is 2 or more this
+				event is not triggered.
 							*BufWipeout*
 BufWipeout			Before completely deleting a buffer.  The
 				BufUnload and BufDelete events may be called
@@ -678,10 +682,10 @@ MenuPopup			Just before showing the popup menu (under the
 QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 				|:lmake|, |:grep|, |:lgrep|, |:grepadd|,
 				|:lgrepadd|, |:vimgrep|, |:lvimgrep|,
-				|:vimgrepadd|, |:lvimgrepadd|). The pattern is
-				matched against the command being run.  When
-				|:grep| is used but 'grepprg' is set to
-				"internal" it still matches "grep".
+				|:vimgrepadd|, |:lvimgrepadd|, |:cscope|).
+				The pattern is matched against the command
+				being run.  When |:grep| is used but 'grepprg'
+				is set to "internal" it still matches "grep".
 				This command cannot be used to set the
 				'makeprg' and 'grepprg' variables.
 				If this command causes an error, the quickfix
@@ -799,6 +803,8 @@ VimLeave			Before exiting Vim, just after writing the
 				.viminfo file.  Executed only once, like
 				VimLeavePre.
 				To detect an abnormal exit use |v:dying|.
+				When v:dying is 2 or more this event is not
+				triggered.
 							*VimLeavePre*
 VimLeavePre			Before exiting Vim, just before writing the
 				.viminfo file.  This is executed only once,
@@ -807,6 +813,8 @@ VimLeavePre			Before exiting Vim, just before writing the
 				Mostly useful with a "*" pattern. >
 	:autocmd VimLeavePre * call CleanupStuff()
 <				To detect an abnormal exit use |v:dying|.
+				When v:dying is 2 or more this event is not
+				triggered.
 							*VimResized*
 VimResized			After the Vim window was resized, thus 'lines'
 				and/or 'columns' changed.  Not when starting
@@ -1272,7 +1280,7 @@ and "++ff=" argument that are effective.  These should be used for the command
 that reads/writes the file.  The |v:cmdbang| variable is one when "!" was
 used, zero otherwise.
 
-See the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin/netrw.vim for examples.
+See the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin/netrwPlugin.vim for examples.
 
 ==============================================================================
 11. Disabling autocommands				*autocmd-disable*

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Nov 11
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ gR			Enter Virtual Replace mode: Each character you type
 			<Tab> may replace several characters at once.
 			Repeat the entered text [count]-1 times.  See
 			|Virtual-Replace-mode| for more details.
-			{not available when compiled without the +vreplace
+			{not available when compiled without the |+vreplace|
 			feature}
 
 							*c*
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ gr{char}		Replace the virtual characters under the cursor with
 			space.  See |gR| and |Virtual-Replace-mode| for more
 			details.  As with |r| a count may be given.
 			{char} can be entered like with |r|.
-			{not available when compiled without the +vreplace
+			{not available when compiled without the |+vreplace|
 			feature}
 
 						*digraph-arg*
@@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ For other systems the tmpnam() library function is used.
 			":&r".  See |:s_flags| for [flags].
 
 								*&*
-&			Synonym for ":s//~/" (repeat last substitute).  Note
+&			Synonym for ":s" (repeat last substitute).  Note
 			that the flags are not remembered, thus it might
 			actually work differently.  You can use ":&&" to keep
 			the flags.
@@ -622,9 +622,9 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 	    'a'	    to substitute this and all remaining matches {not in Vi}
 	    'q'	    to quit substituting {not in Vi}
 	    CTRL-E  to scroll the screen up {not in Vi, not available when
-			compiled without the +insert_expand feature}
+			compiled without the |+insert_expand| feature}
 	    CTRL-Y  to scroll the screen down {not in Vi, not available when
-			compiled without the +insert_expand feature}
+			compiled without the |+insert_expand| feature}
 	If the 'edcompatible' option is on, Vim remembers the [c] flag and
 	toggles it each time you use it, but resets it when you give a new
 	search pattern.
@@ -1139,7 +1139,7 @@ characters.  If the String ends in a <NL>, it is regarded as a linewise
 register.  {not in Vi}
 
 7. Selection and drop registers "*, "+ and "~ 
-Use these register for storing and retrieving the selected text for the GUI.
+Use these registers for storing and retrieving the selected text for the GUI.
 See |quotestar| and |quoteplus|.  When the clipboard is not available or not
 working, the unnamed register is used instead.  For Unix systems the clipboard
 is only available when the |+xterm_clipboard| feature is present.  {not in Vi}
@@ -1245,7 +1245,8 @@ gq{motion}		Format the lines that {motion} moves over.
 				:nnoremap Q gq
 
 gqgq							*gqgq* *gqq*
-gqq			Format the current line.  {not in Vi}
+gqq			Format the current line.  With a count format that
+			many lines.  {not in Vi}
 
 							*v_gq*
 {Visual}gq		Format the highlighted text.  (for {Visual} see

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Oct 25
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ CTRL-R CTRL-A				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-A* *c_<C-R>_<C-A>*
 		the word that was already typed is not inserted again.
 
 		{not in Vi}
-		CTRL-F and CTRL-P: {only when +file_in_path feature is
+		CTRL-F and CTRL-P: {only when |+file_in_path| feature is
 		included}
 
 					*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R* *c_<C-R>_<C-R>*
@@ -416,11 +416,15 @@ CTRL-L		A match is done on the pattern in front of the cursor.  If
 		than the pattern, no completion is done.
 		When 'incsearch' is set, entering a search pattern for "/" or
 		"?" and the current match is displayed then CTRL-L will add
-		one character from the end of the current match.
+		one character from the end of the current match.  If
+		'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the command line has
+		no uppercase characters, the added character is converted to
+		lowercase.
 
 The 'wildchar' option defaults to <Tab> (CTRL-E when in Vi compatible mode; in
 a previous version <Esc> was used).  In the pattern standard wildcards '*' and
-'?' are accepted.  '*' matches any string, '?' matches exactly one character.
+'?' are accepted when matching file names.  '*' matches any string, '?'
+matches exactly one character.
 
 If you like tcsh's autolist completion, you can use this mapping:
 	:cnoremap X <C-L><C-D>
@@ -522,6 +526,7 @@ followed by another Vim command:
     :registers
     :read !
     :scscope
+    :sign
     :tcl
     :tcldo
     :tclfile
@@ -750,7 +755,7 @@ function expand() |expand()|.
 	#<n	(where n is a number > 0) is replaced with old	  *:_#<* *c_#<*
 		file name n.  See |:oldfiles| or |v:oldfiles| to get the
 		number.							*E809*
-		{only when compiled with the +eval and +viminfo features}
+		{only when compiled with the |+eval| and |+viminfo| features}
 
 Note that these, except "#<n", give the file name as it was typed.  If an
 absolute path is needed (when using the file name from a different directory),
@@ -804,6 +809,7 @@ Note: these are typed literally, they are not special keys!
 
 							 *filename-modifiers*
 	 *:_%:* *::8* *::p* *::.* *::~* *::h* *::t* *::r* *::e* *::s* *::gs*
+	        *%:8* *%:p* *%:.* *%:~* *%:h* *%:t* *%:r* *%:e* *%:s* *%:gs*
 The file name modifiers can be used after "%", "#", "#n", "<cfile>", "<sfile>",
 "<afile>" or "<abuf>".  They are also used with the |fnamemodify()| function.
 These are not available when Vim has been compiled without the |+modify_fname|
@@ -1027,7 +1033,7 @@ VARIOUS
 The command-line window cannot be used:
 - when there already is a command-line window (no nesting)
 - for entering an encryption key or when using inputsecret()
-- when Vim was not compiled with the +vertsplit feature
+- when Vim was not compiled with the |+vertsplit| feature
 
 Some options are set when the command-line window is opened:
 'filetype'	"vim", when editing an Ex command-line; this starts Vim syntax

runtime/doc/debug.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debug.txt*     For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Jul 22
+*debug.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -22,7 +22,8 @@ compilation, here is what you can do to find out exactly where Vim crashes.
 This also applies when using the MingW tools.
 
 1. Compile Vim with the "-g" option (there is a line in the Makefile for this,
-   which you can uncomment).
+   which you can uncomment).  Also make sure "strip" is disabled (do not
+   install it, or use the line "STRIP = /bin/true").
 
 2. Execute these commands (replace "11" with the test that fails): >
 	cd testdir
@@ -39,7 +40,7 @@ This also applies when using the MingW tools.
 
 ==============================================================================
 
-2. Locating memory leaks				*debug-leaks*
+2. Locating memory leaks			*debug-leaks* *valgrind*
 
 If you suspect Vim is leaking memory and you are using Linux, the valgrind
 tool is very useful to pinpoint memory leaks.
@@ -47,14 +48,18 @@ tool is very useful to pinpoint memory leaks.
 First of all, build Vim with EXITFREE defined.  Search for this in MAKEFILE
 and uncomment the line.
 
-Use this command to start Vim:				*valgrind*
+Use this command to start Vim:
 >
-	valgrind --log-file=valgrind.log ./vim
+	valgrind --log-file=valgrind.log --leak-check=full ./vim
 
 Note: Vim will run much slower.  If your .vimrc is big or you have several
 plugins you need to be patient for startup, or run with the "-u NONE"
 argument.
 
+There are often a few leaks from libraries, such as getpwuid() and
+XtVaAppCreateShell().  Those are unavoidable.  The number of bytes should be
+very small a Kbyte or less.
+
 ==============================================================================
 
 3. Windows Bug Reporting				*debug-win32*
@@ -63,7 +68,7 @@ If the Windows version of Vim crashes in a reproducible manner, you can take
 some steps to provide a useful bug report.
 
 
-GENERIC ~
+3.1 GENERIC ~
 
 You must obtain the debugger symbols (PDB) file for your executable: gvim.pdb
 for gvim.exe, or vim.pdb for vim.exe. The PDB should be available from the
@@ -85,7 +90,7 @@ a Vim executable compiled with the Borland compiler; gdb (see above
 
 
 								*debug-vs2005*
-2.2 Debugging Vim crashes with Visual Studio 2005/Visual C++ 2005 Express ~
+3.2 Debugging Vim crashes with Visual Studio 2005/Visual C++ 2005 Express ~
 
 First launch vim.exe or gvim.exe and then launch Visual Studio.  (If you don't
 have Visual Studio, follow the instructions at |get-ms-debuggers| to obtain a
@@ -119,7 +124,7 @@ installed as a just-in-time debugger. Use WinDbg, |debug-windbg|, if you
 need to save minidumps or you want a just-in-time (postmortem) debugger.
 
 								*debug-windbg*
-2.3 Debugging Vim crashes with WinDbg ~
+3.3 Debugging Vim crashes with WinDbg ~
 
 See |get-ms-debuggers| to obtain a copy of WinDbg.
 
@@ -145,7 +150,7 @@ To save a minidump, type the following at the WinDbg command line: >
         .dump vim.dmp
 <
 							*debug-minidump*
-2.4 Opening a Minidump ~
+3.4 Opening a Minidump ~
 
 If you have a minidump file, you can open it in Visual Studio or in WinDbg.
 
@@ -157,7 +162,7 @@ In WinDbg: choose Open Crash Dump on the File menu. Follow the instructions in
 |debug-windbg| to set the Symbol File Path.
 
 							*get-ms-debuggers*
-2.5 Obtaining Microsoft Debugging Tools ~
+3.5 Obtaining Microsoft Debugging Tools ~
 
 The Debugging Tools for Windows (including WinDbg) can be downloaded from
     http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/default.mspx

runtime/doc/debugger.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debugger.txt*  For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*debugger.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur

runtime/doc/develop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Dec 17
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Dec 17
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/diff.txt

@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Sep 15
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
 
 
 				*diff* *vimdiff* *gvimdiff* *diff-mode*
-This file describes the +diff feature: Showing differences between two,
+This file describes the |+diff| feature: Showing differences between two,
 three or four versions of the same file.
 
 The basics are explained in section |08.7| of the user manual.
@@ -57,6 +57,7 @@ In each of the edited files these options are set:
 
 	'diff'		on
 	'scrollbind'	on
+	'cursorbind'	on
 	'scrollopt'	includes "hor"
 	'wrap'		off
 	'foldmethod'	"diff"
@@ -133,6 +134,7 @@ the old values are not remembered.
 
 	'diff'		off
 	'scrollbind'	off
+	'cursorbind'	off
 	'scrollopt'	without "hor"
 	'wrap'		on
 	'foldmethod'	"manual"
@@ -259,10 +261,12 @@ that the buffers will be equal within the specified range.
 							*do*
 do		Same as ":diffget" without argument or range.  The "o" stands
 		for "obtain" ("dg" can't be used, it could be the start of
-		"dgg"!).
+		"dgg"!). Note: this doesn't work in Visual mode.
 
 							*dp*
 dp		Same as ":diffput" without argument or range.
+		Note: this doesn't work in Visual mode.
+
 
 When no [range] is given, the diff at the cursor position or just above it is
 affected.  When [range] is used, Vim tries to only put or get the specified

runtime/doc/digraph.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*digraph.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Aug 06
+*digraph.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Apr 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ conversion to be available, it might fail.  For the NUL character you will see
 "10".  That's because NUL characters are internally represented with a NL
 character.  When you write the file it will become a NUL character.
 
-When Vim was compiled without the +multi_byte feature, you need to specify the
-character in the encoding given with 'encoding'.  You might want to use
+When Vim was compiled without the |+multi_byte| feature, you need to specify
+the character in the encoding given with 'encoding'.  You might want to use
 something like this: >
 
 	if has("multi_byte")

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Jun 10
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ fourth file in the argument list.  This happens when you do ":e file".
 LOCAL ARGUMENT LIST
 
 {not in Vi}
-{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or |+listcmds| feature}
+{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or |+listcmds| features}
 
 							*:arglocal*
 :argl[ocal]		Make a local copy of the global argument list.
@@ -1171,14 +1171,21 @@ If you want to always use ":confirm", set the 'confirm' option.
 			*:browse* *:bro* *E338* *E614* *E615* *E616* *E578*
 :bro[wse] {command}	Open a file selection dialog for an argument to
 			{command}.  At present this works for |:e|, |:w|,
-			|:r|, |:saveas|, |:sp|, |:mkexrc|, |:mkvimrc|,
-			|:mksession|, |:split|, |:vsplit|, and |:tabe|.
+			|:wall|, |:wq|, |:wqall|, |:x|, |:xall|, |:exit|,
+			|:view|, |:sview|, |:r|, |:saveas|, |:sp|, |:mkexrc|,
+			|:mkvimrc|, |:mksession|, |:mkview|, |:split|,
+			|:vsplit|, |:tabe|, |:tabnew|, |:cfile|, |:cgetfile|,
+			|:caddfile|, |:lfile|, |:lgetfile|, |:laddfile|,
+			|:diffsplit|, |:diffpatch|, |:open|, |:pedit|,
+			|:redir|, |:source|, |:update|, |:visual|, |:vsplit|,
+			and |:qall| if 'confirm' is set.
 			{only in Win32, Athena, Motif, GTK and Mac GUI}
 			When ":browse" is not possible you get an error
 			message.  If the |+browse| feature is missing or the
 			{command} doesn't support browsing, the {command} is
 			executed without a dialog.
 			":browse set" works like |:options|.
+			See also |:oldfiles| for ":browse oldfiles".
 
 The syntax is best shown via some examples: >
 	:browse e $vim/foo
@@ -1331,11 +1338,14 @@ There are a few things to remember when editing binary files:
 
 Vim is able to write files encrypted, and read them back.  The encrypted text
 cannot be read without the right key.
+{only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature}  *E833*
 
-Note: The swapfile and text in memory is not encrypted.  A system
-administrator will be able to see your text while you are editing it.
-When filtering text with ":!filter" or using ":w !command" the text is not
-encrypted, this may reveal it to others.
+The text in the swap file and the undo file is also encrypted.
+
+Note: The text in memory is not encrypted.  A system administrator may be able
+to see your text while you are editing it.  When filtering text with
+":!filter" or using ":w !command" the text is not encrypted, this may reveal
+it to others.  The 'viminfo' file is not encrypted.
 
 WARNING: If you make a typo when entering the key and then write the file and
 exit, the text will be lost!
@@ -1361,10 +1371,36 @@ the file is encrypted.
 To disable the encryption, reset the 'key' option to an empty value: >
 	:set key=
 
-When reading a file that has been encrypted and this option is not empty, it
-will be used for decryption.  If the value is empty, you will be prompted to
-enter the key.  If you don't enter a key, the file is edited without being
-decrypted.
+You can use the 'cryptmethod' option to select the type of encryption, use one
+of these two: >
+	:setlocal cm=zip       " weak method, backwards compatible
+	:setlocal cm=blowfish  " strong method
+Do this before writing the file.  When reading an encrypted file it will be
+set automatically to the method used when that file was written.  You can
+change 'cryptmethod' before writing that file to change the method.
+To set the default method, used for new files, use one of these in your
+|vimrc| file: >
+	set cm=zip
+	set cm=blowfish
+
+When writing an undo file, the same key and method will be used for the text
+in the undo file. |persistent-undo|.
+
+						*E817* *E818* *E819* *E820*
+When encryption does not work properly, you would be able to write your text
+to a file and never be able to read it back.  Therefore a test is performed to
+check if the encryption works as expected.  If you get one of these errors
+don't write the file encrypted!  You need to rebuild the Vim binary to fix
+this.
+
+*E831* This is an internal error, "cannot happen".  If you can reproduce it,
+please report to the developers.
+
+When reading a file that has been encrypted and the 'key' option is not empty,
+it will be used for decryption.  If the value is empty, you will be prompted
+to enter the key.  If you don't enter a key, or you enter the wrong key, the
+file is edited without being decrypted.  There is no warning about using the
+wrong key (this makes brute force methods to find the key more difficult).
 
 If want to start reading a file that uses a different key, set the 'key'
 option to an empty string, so that Vim will prompt for a new one.  Don't use
@@ -1374,10 +1410,13 @@ your shoulder.
 Since the value of the 'key' option is supposed to be a secret, its value can
 never be viewed.  You should not set this option in a vimrc file.
 
-An encrypted file can be recognized by the "file" command, if you add this
-line to "/etc/magic", "/usr/share/misc/magic" or wherever your system has the
+An encrypted file can be recognized by the "file" command, if you add these
+lines to "/etc/magic", "/usr/share/misc/magic" or wherever your system has the
 "magic" file: >
      0	string	VimCrypt~	Vim encrypted file
+     >9	string	01	- "zip" cryptmethod
+     >9	string	02	- "blowfish" cryptmethod
+
 
 Notes:
 - Encryption is not possible when doing conversion with 'charconvert'.
@@ -1392,13 +1431,15 @@ Notes:
   history, showing the 'key' value in a viminfo file.
 - There is never 100% safety.  The encryption in Vim has not been tested for
   robustness.
-- The algorithm used is breakable.  A 4 character key in about one hour, a 6
-  character key in one day (on a Pentium 133 PC).  This requires that you know
-  some text that must appear in the file.  An expert can break it for any key.
-  When the text has been decrypted, this also means that the key can be
-  revealed, and other files encrypted with the same key can be decrypted.
-- Pkzip uses the same encryption, and US Govt has no objection to its export.
-  Pkzip's public file APPNOTE.TXT describes this algorithm in detail.
+- The algorithm used for 'cryptmethod' "zip" is breakable.  A 4 character key
+  in about one hour, a 6 character key in one day (on a Pentium 133 PC).  This
+  requires that you know some text that must appear in the file.  An expert
+  can break it for any key.  When the text has been decrypted, this also means
+  that the key can be revealed, and other files encrypted with the same key
+  can be decrypted.
+- Pkzip uses the same encryption as 'cryptmethod' "zip", and US Govt has no
+  objection to its export.  Pkzip's public file APPNOTE.TXT describes this
+  algorithm in detail.
 - Vim originates from the Netherlands.  That is where the sources come from.
   Thus the encryption code is not exported from the USA.
 
@@ -1583,10 +1624,13 @@ There are three different types of searching:
 
    In the above example you might want to set path to: >
 	:set path=**,/u/user_x/**
-<   This searches: >
-	/u/user_x/work/release/**
-	/u/user_x/**
-<   This searches the same directories, but in a different order.
+<  This searches:
+	/u/user_x/work/release/** ~
+	/u/user_x/** ~
+   This searches the same directories, but in a different order.
 
+   Note that completion for ":find", ":sfind", and ":tabfind" commands do not
+   currently work with 'path' items that contain a url or use the double star
+   (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations. >
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/eval.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2010 Jan 05
+*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Oct 18
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -63,21 +63,21 @@ The Number and String types are converted automatically, depending on how they
 are used.
 
 Conversion from a Number to a String is by making the ASCII representation of
-the Number.  Examples: >
-	Number 123	-->	String "123"
-	Number 0	-->	String "0"
-	Number -1	-->	String "-1"
-
+the Number.  Examples:
+	Number 123	-->	String "123" ~
+	Number 0	-->	String "0" ~
+	Number -1	-->	String "-1" ~
+							*octal*
 Conversion from a String to a Number is done by converting the first digits
 to a number.  Hexadecimal "0xf9" and Octal "017" numbers are recognized.  If
-the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero.  Examples: >
-	String "456"	-->	Number 456
-	String "6bar"	-->	Number 6
-	String "foo"	-->	Number 0
-	String "0xf1"	-->	Number 241
-	String "0100"	-->	Number 64
-	String "-8"	-->	Number -8
-	String "+8"	-->	Number 0
+the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero.  Examples:
+	String "456"	-->	Number 456 ~
+	String "6bar"	-->	Number 6 ~
+	String "foo"	-->	Number 0 ~
+	String "0xf1"	-->	Number 241 ~
+	String "0100"	-->	Number 64 ~
+	String "-8"	-->	Number -8 ~
+	String "+8"	-->	Number 0 ~
 
 To force conversion from String to Number, add zero to it: >
 	:echo "0100" + 0
@@ -535,6 +535,10 @@ remaining that refers to it.
 
 It is not necessary to use the "dict" attribute for a numbered function.
 
+If you get an error for a numbered function, you can find out what it is with
+a trick.  Assuming the function is 42, the command is: >
+	:function {42}
+
 
 Functions for Dictionaries ~
 							*E715*
@@ -1020,7 +1024,9 @@ A string constant accepts these special characters:
 \t	tab <Tab>
 \\	backslash
 \"	double quote
-\<xxx>	Special key named "xxx".  e.g. "\<C-W>" for CTRL-W.
+\<xxx>	Special key named "xxx".  e.g. "\<C-W>" for CTRL-W.  This is for use
+	in mappings, the 0x80 byte is escaped.  Don't use <Char-xxxx> to get a
+	utf-8 character, use \uxxxx as mentioned above.
 
 Note that "\xff" is stored as the byte 255, which may be invalid in some
 encodings.  Use "\u00ff" to store character 255 according to the current value
@@ -1109,8 +1115,8 @@ See below |functions|.
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-3. Internal variable				*internal-variables* *E121*
-									*E461*
+3. Internal variable				*internal-variables* *E461*
+
 An internal variable name can be made up of letters, digits and '_'.  But it
 cannot start with a digit.  It's also possible to use curly braces, see
 |curly-braces-names|.
@@ -1164,7 +1170,7 @@ is deleted when the window is closed.
 						*tabpage-variable* *t:var*
 A variable name that is preceded with "t:" is local to the current tab page,
 It is deleted when the tab page is closed. {not available when compiled
-without the +windows feature}
+without the |+windows| feature}
 
 						*global-variable* *g:var*
 Inside functions global variables are accessed with "g:".  Omitting this will
@@ -1284,7 +1290,7 @@ v:beval_winnr	The number of the window, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
 
 					*v:char* *char-variable*
 v:char		Argument for evaluating 'formatexpr' and used for the typed
-		character when using <expr> in an abbreviation |map-<expr>|.
+		character when using <expr> in an abbreviation |:map-<expr>|.
 
 			*v:charconvert_from* *charconvert_from-variable*
 v:charconvert_from
@@ -1346,7 +1352,9 @@ v:dying		Normally zero.	When a deadly signal is caught it's set to
 		terminate normally. {only works on Unix}
 		Example: >
 	:au VimLeave * if v:dying | echo "\nAAAAaaaarrrggghhhh!!!\n" | endif
-<
+<		Note: if another deadly signal is caught when v:dying is one,
+		VimLeave autocommands will not be executed.
+
 					*v:errmsg* *errmsg-variable*
 v:errmsg	Last given error message.  It's allowed to set this variable.
 		Example: >
@@ -1470,10 +1478,11 @@ v:lc_time	The current locale setting for time messages of the runtime
 		command.  See |multi-lang|.
 
 						*v:lnum* *lnum-variable*
-v:lnum		Line number for the 'foldexpr' |fold-expr| and 'indentexpr'
-		expressions, tab page number for 'guitablabel' and
-		'guitabtooltip'.  Only valid while one of these expressions is
-		being evaluated.  Read-only when in the |sandbox|.
+v:lnum		Line number for the 'foldexpr' |fold-expr|, 'formatexpr' and
+		'indentexpr' expressions, tab page number for 'guitablabel'
+		and 'guitabtooltip'.  Only valid while one of these
+		expressions is being evaluated.  Read-only when in the
+		|sandbox|.
 
 					*v:mouse_win* *mouse_win-variable*
 v:mouse_win	Window number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
@@ -1499,7 +1508,7 @@ v:oldfiles	List of file names that is loaded from the |viminfo| file on
 		The List can be modified, but this has no effect on what is
 		stored in the |viminfo| file later.  If you use values other
 		than String this will cause trouble.
-		{only when compiled with the +viminfo feature}
+		{only when compiled with the |+viminfo| feature}
 
 					*v:operator* *operator-variable*
 v:operator	The last operator given in Normal mode.  This is a single
@@ -1648,6 +1657,11 @@ v:version	Version number of Vim: Major version number times 100 plus
 					*v:warningmsg* *warningmsg-variable*
 v:warningmsg	Last given warning message.  It's allowed to set this variable.
 
+					*v:windowid* *windowid-variable*
+v:windowid	When any X11 based GUI is running or when running in a
+		terminal and Vim connects to the X server (|-X|) this will be
+		set to the window ID.  Otherwise the value is zero.
+
 ==============================================================================
 4. Builtin Functions					*functions*
 
@@ -1658,6 +1672,7 @@ See |function-list| for a list grouped by what the function is used for.
 USAGE				RESULT	DESCRIPTION	~
 
 abs( {expr})			Float or Number  absolute value of {expr}
+acos( {expr})			Float	arc cosine of {expr}
 add( {list}, {item})		List	append {item} to |List| {list}
 append( {lnum}, {string})	Number	append {string} below line {lnum}
 append( {lnum}, {list})		Number	append lines {list} below line {lnum}
@@ -1665,7 +1680,9 @@ argc()				Number	number of files in the argument list
 argidx()			Number	current index in the argument list
 argv( {nr})			String	{nr} entry of the argument list
 argv( )				List	the argument list
+asin( {expr})			Float	arc sine of {expr}
 atan( {expr})			Float	arc tangent of {expr}
+atan2( {expr}, {expr})		Float   arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}
 browse( {save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
 				String	put up a file requester
 browsedir( {title}, {initdir})	String	put up a directory requester
@@ -1692,6 +1709,7 @@ confirm( {msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
 				Number	number of choice picked by user
 copy( {expr})			any	make a shallow copy of {expr}
 cos( {expr})			Float	cosine of {expr}
+cosh( {expr})			Float	hyperbolic cosine of {expr}
 count( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
 				Number	 count how many {expr} are in {list}
 cscope_connection( [{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
@@ -1712,6 +1730,7 @@ executable( {expr})		Number	1 if executable {expr} exists
 exists( {expr})			Number	TRUE if {expr} exists
 extend( {expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
 				List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
+exp( {expr})			Float	exponential of {expr}
 expand( {expr} [, {flag}])	String	expand special keywords in {expr}
 feedkeys( {string} [, {mode}])	Number	add key sequence to typeahead buffer
 filereadable( {file})		Number	TRUE if {file} is a readable file
@@ -1724,6 +1743,7 @@ findfile( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]])
 				String	find file {name} in {path}
 float2nr( {expr})		Number	convert Float {expr} to a Number
 floor( {expr})			Float	round {expr} down
+fmod( {expr1}, {expr2})		Float	remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}
 fnameescape( {fname})		String	escape special characters in {fname}
 fnamemodify( {fname}, {mods})	String	modify file name
 foldclosed( {lnum})		Number	first line of fold at {lnum} if closed
@@ -1759,6 +1779,7 @@ getpos( {expr})			List	position of cursor, mark, etc.
 getqflist()			List	list of quickfix items
 getreg( [{regname} [, 1]])	String	contents of register
 getregtype( [{regname}])	String	type of register
+gettabvar( {nr}, {varname})	any	variable {varname} in tab {nr}
 gettabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {name})
 				any	{name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}
 getwinposx()			Number	X coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
@@ -1803,9 +1824,10 @@ line( {expr})			Number	line nr of cursor, last line or mark
 line2byte( {lnum})		Number	byte count of line {lnum}
 lispindent( {lnum})		Number	Lisp indent for line {lnum}
 localtime()			Number	current time
+log( {expr})			Float	natural logarithm (base e) of {expr}
 log10( {expr})			Float	logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10
 map( {expr}, {string})		List/Dict  change each item in {expr} to {expr}
-maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])
 				String	rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
 mapcheck( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
 				String	check for mappings matching {name}
@@ -1877,6 +1899,7 @@ setmatches( {list})		Number	restore a list of matches
 setpos( {expr}, {list})		Number	set the {expr} position to {list}
 setqflist( {list}[, {action}])	Number	modify quickfix list using {list}
 setreg( {n}, {v}[, {opt}])	Number	set register to value and type
+settabvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val}
 settabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})    set {varname} in window
 					{winnr} in tab page {tabnr} to {val}
 setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
@@ -1885,6 +1908,7 @@ shellescape( {string} [, {special}])
 					command argument
 simplify( {filename})		String	simplify filename as much as possible
 sin( {expr})			Float	sine of {expr}
+sinh( {expr})			Float	hyperbolic sine of {expr}
 sort( {list} [, {func}])	List	sort {list}, using {func} to compare
 soundfold( {word})		String	sound-fold {word}
 spellbadword()			String	badly spelled word at cursor
@@ -1895,6 +1919,8 @@ split( {expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
 sqrt( {expr}			Float	squar root of {expr}
 str2float( {expr})		Float	convert String to Float
 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}])	Number	convert String to Number
+strchars( {expr})		Number	character length of the String {expr}
+strdisplaywidth( {expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr}
 strftime( {format}[, {time}])	String	time in specified format
 stridx( {haystack}, {needle}[, {start}])
 				Number	index of {needle} in {haystack}
@@ -1905,6 +1931,7 @@ strpart( {src}, {start}[, {len}])
 strridx( {haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
 				Number	last index of {needle} in {haystack}
 strtrans( {expr})		String	translate string to make it printable
+strwidth( {expr})		Number	display cell length of the String {expr}
 submatch( {nr})			String	specific match in ":substitute"
 substitute( {expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})
 				String	all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub}
@@ -1912,6 +1939,7 @@ synID( {lnum}, {col}, {trans})	Number	syntax ID at {lnum} and {col}
 synIDattr( {synID}, {what} [, {mode}])
 				String	attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID}
 synIDtrans( {synID})		Number	translated syntax ID of {synID}
+synconcealed( {lnum}, {col})	List    info about concealing
 synstack( {lnum}, {col})	List	stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col}
 system( {expr} [, {input}])	String	output of shell command/filter {expr}
 tabpagebuflist( [{arg}])	List	list of buffer numbers in tab page
@@ -1921,12 +1949,16 @@ tabpagewinnr( {tabarg}[, {arg}])
 taglist( {expr})		List	list of tags matching {expr}
 tagfiles()			List	tags files used
 tempname()			String	name for a temporary file
+tan( {expr})			Float	tangent of {expr}
+tanh( {expr})			Float	hyperbolic tangent of {expr}
 tolower( {expr})		String	the String {expr} switched to lowercase
 toupper( {expr})		String	the String {expr} switched to uppercase
 tr( {src}, {fromstr}, {tostr})	String	translate chars of {src} in {fromstr}
 					to chars in {tostr}
 trunc( {expr}			Float	truncate Float {expr}
 type( {name})			Number	type of variable {name}
+undofile( {name})		String	undo file name for {name}
+undotree()			List	undo file tree
 values( {dict})			List	values in {dict}
 virtcol( {expr})		Number	screen column of cursor or mark
 visualmode( [expr])		String	last visual mode used
@@ -1956,6 +1988,20 @@ abs({expr})							*abs()*
 <			4
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 
+
+acos({expr})							*acos()*
+		Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a
+		|Float| in the range of [0, pi].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		[-1, 1].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo acos(0)
+<			1.570796 >
+			:echo acos(-0.5)
+<			2.094395
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
 add({list}, {expr})					*add()*
 		Append the item {expr} to |List| {list}.  Returns the
 		resulting |List|.  Examples: >
@@ -1998,6 +2044,19 @@ argv([{nr}])	The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the
 <		Without the {nr} argument a |List| with the whole |arglist| is
 		returned.
 
+asin({expr})						*asin()*
+		Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float|
+		in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		[-1, 1].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo asin(0.8)
+<			0.927295 >
+			:echo asin(-0.5)
+<			-0.523599
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
 atan({expr})						*atan()*
 		Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in
 		the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|.
@@ -2009,6 +2068,19 @@ atan({expr})						*atan()*
 <			-1.326405
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 
+
+atan2({expr1}, {expr2})					*atan2()*
+		Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in
+		radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi].
+		{expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo atan2(-1, 1)
+<			-0.785398 >
+			:echo atan2(1, -1)
+<			2.356194
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
 							*browse()*
 browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
 		Put up a file requester.  This only works when "has("browse")"
@@ -2292,11 +2364,13 @@ confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
 		choice this is 1.
 		Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog
 		support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|.
+
 		{msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the
 		alternatives.  When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is
 		used (and translated).
 		{msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline.  Only on
 		some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit.
+
 		{choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated
 		by '\n', e.g. >
 			confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel")
@@ -2306,15 +2380,18 @@ confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
 			confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All")
 <		For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as
 		the default shortcut key.
+
 		The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice
 		that is made if the user hits <CR>.  Use 1 to make the first
 		choice the default one.  Use 0 to not set a default.  If
 		{default} is omitted, 1 is used.
-		The optional {type} argument gives the type of dialog.	This
-		is only used for the icon of the Win32 GUI.  It can be one of
-		these values: "Error", "Question", "Info", "Warning" or
-		"Generic".  Only the first character is relevant.  When {type}
-		is omitted, "Generic" is used.
+
+		The optional {type} argument gives the type of dialog.  This
+		is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and Win32
+		GUI.  It can be one of these values: "Error", "Question",
+		"Info", "Warning" or "Generic".  Only the first character is
+		relevant.  When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is used.
+
 		If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C,
 		or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0.
 
@@ -2353,6 +2430,18 @@ cos({expr})						*cos()*
 <			-0.646043
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 
+
+cosh({expr})						*cosh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[1, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo cosh(0.5)
+<			1.127626 >
+			:echo cosh(-0.5)
+<			-1.127626
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
 		
 count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]])			*count()*
 		Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears
@@ -2613,6 +2702,18 @@ exists({expr})	The result is a Number, which is non-zero if {expr} is
 <		This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable,
 		but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists.
 
+exp({expr})						*exp()*
+		Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[0, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo exp(2)
+<			7.389056 >
+			:echo exp(-1)
+<			0.367879
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
 expand({expr} [, {flag}])				*expand()*
 		Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {expr}.
 		The result is a String.
@@ -2801,7 +2902,8 @@ finddir({name}[, {path}[, {count}]])				*finddir()*
 		{name} in {path} instead of the first one.
 		When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|.
 		This is quite similar to the ex-command |:find|.
-		{only available when compiled with the +file_in_path feature}
+		{only available when compiled with the |+file_in_path|
+		feature}
 
 findfile({name}[, {path}[, {count}]])				*findfile()*
 		Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory.
@@ -2845,6 +2947,23 @@ floor({expr})							*floor()*
 <			4.0
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 		
+
+fmod({expr1}, {expr2})					*fmod()*
+		Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the
+		division is not representable.  Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2}
+		for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the
+		result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than
+		the magnitude of {expr2}.  If {expr2} is zero, the value
+		returned is zero.  The value returned is a |Float|.
+		{expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo fmod(12.33, 1.22)
+<			0.13 >
+			:echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22)
+<			-0.13
+		{only available when compiled with |+float| feature}
+
+
 fnameescape({string})					*fnameescape()*
 		Escape {string} for use as file name command argument.	All
 		characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|'
@@ -3261,6 +3380,12 @@ getregtype([{regname}])					*getregtype()*
 		<CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16.
 		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
 
+gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname})				*gettabvar()*
+		Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page
+		{tabnr}. |t:var|
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.
+		Note that the name without "t:" must be used.
+
 gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname})		*gettabwinvar()*
 		Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window
 		{winnr} in tab page {tabnr}.
@@ -3500,7 +3625,7 @@ iconv({expr}, {from}, {to})				*iconv()*
 <		Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion
 		from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8.  You
 		cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes.
-		{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte feature}
+		{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature}
 
 							*indent()*
 indent({lnum})	The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the
@@ -3800,6 +3925,18 @@ localtime()						*localtime()*
 		1970.  See also |strftime()| and |getftime()|.
 
 
+log({expr})						*log()*
+		Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|.
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+		(0, inf].
+		Examples: >
+			:echo log(10)
+<			2.302585 >
+			:echo log(exp(5))
+<			5.0
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
 log10({expr})						*log10()*
 		Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|.
 		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
@@ -3835,23 +3972,51 @@ map({expr}, {string})					*map()*
 		further items in {expr} are processed.
 
 
-maparg({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*maparg()*
-		Return the rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}.  When there
-		is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is returned.
+maparg({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])			*maparg()*
+		When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping
+		{name} in mode {mode}.  The returned String has special
+		characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command
+		listing.
+		
+		When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is
+		returned.
+
+		The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map"
+		command.
+
 		{mode} can be one of these strings:
 			"n"	Normal
-			"v"	Visual
+			"v"	Visual (including Select)
 			"o"	Operator-pending
 			"i"	Insert
 			"c"	Cmd-line
+			"s"	Select
+			"x"	Visual
 			"l"	langmap |language-mapping|
 			""	Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
 		When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
+
 		When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
 		instead of mappings.
-		The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map"
-		command.  The returned String has special characters
-		translated like in the output of the ":map" command listing.
+
+		When {dict} is there and it is non-zero return a dictionary
+		containing all the information of the mapping with the
+		following items:
+		  "lhs"	     The {lhs} of the mapping.
+		  "rhs"	     The {rhs} of the mapping as typed.
+		  "silent"   1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0.
+		  "noremap"  1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is remappable.
+		  "expr"     1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|).
+		  "buffer"   1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|).
+		  "mode"     Modes for which the mapping is defined. In
+			     addition to the modes mentioned above, these
+			     characters will be used:
+			     " "     Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+			     "!"     Insert and Commandline mode
+				     (|mapmpde-ic|)
+		  "sid"	     the Script local ID, used for <sid> mappings
+			     (|<SID>|)
+
 		The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
 		then the global mappings.
 		This function can be used to map a key even when it's already
@@ -4394,6 +4559,7 @@ readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
 		as an item.  Lines broken at NL characters.  Macintosh files
 		separated with CR will result in a single long line (unless a
 		NL appears somewhere).
+		All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character.
 		When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used:
 		- When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is
 		  added.
@@ -4401,7 +4567,8 @@ readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
 		Otherwise:
 		- CR characters that appear before a NL are removed.
 		- Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter.
-		All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character.
+		- When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is
+		  removed from the text.
 		When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines
 		to be read.  Useful if you only want to check the first ten
 		lines of a file: >
@@ -4429,7 +4596,7 @@ reltime([{start} [, {end}]])				*reltime()*
 		and {end}.
 		The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by
 		reltime().
-		{only available when compiled with the +reltime feature}
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
 
 reltimestr({time})				*reltimestr()*
 		Return a String that represents the time value of {time}.
@@ -4444,7 +4611,7 @@ reltimestr({time})				*reltimestr()*
 		can use split() to remove it. >
 			echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0]
 <		Also see |profiling|.
-		{only available when compiled with the +reltime feature}
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
 
 							*remote_expr()* *E449*
 remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
@@ -4631,7 +4798,7 @@ search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*search()*
 		{timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second.
 		The value must not be negative.  A zero value is like not
 		giving the argument.
-		{only available when compiled with the +reltime feature}
+		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
 
 		If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
 		move.  No error message is given.
@@ -4784,8 +4951,8 @@ searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
 		column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
 		is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
 		the column position of the match.  If no match is found,
-		returns [0, 0].
->
+		returns [0, 0]. >
+
 			:let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n')
 <
 		See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example.
@@ -4944,6 +5111,8 @@ setqflist({list} [, {action}])				*setqflist()*
 		item will not be handled as an error line.
 		If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will
 		be used.
+		If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be
+		cleared.
 		Note that the list is not exactly the same as what
 		|getqflist()| returns.
 
@@ -4966,7 +5135,7 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 		Set the register {regname} to {value}.
 		If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case,
 		then the value is appended.
-		{options} can also contains a register type specification:
+		{options} can also contain a register type specification:
 		    "c" or "v"	      |characterwise| mode
 		    "l" or "V"	      |linewise| mode
 		    "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode
@@ -4996,6 +5165,15 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 		nothing: >
 			:call setreg('a', '', 'al')
 
+settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val})			*settabvar()*
+		Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}.
+		|t:var|
+		Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used.
+		Tabs are numbered starting with one.
+		Vim briefly goes to the tab page {tabnr}, this may trigger
+		TabLeave and TabEnter autocommands.
+		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
 settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val})	*settabwinvar()*
 		Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to
 		{val}.
@@ -5072,6 +5250,18 @@ sin({expr})						*sin()*
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 		
 
+sinh({expr})						*sinh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+		[-inf, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo sinh(0.5)
+<			0.521095 >
+			:echo sinh(-0.9)
+<			-1.026517
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
 sort({list} [, {func}])					*sort()* *E702*
 		Sort the items in {list} in-place.  Returns {list}.  If you
 		want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
@@ -5217,6 +5407,25 @@ str2nr( {expr} [, {base}])				*str2nr()*
 		Text after the number is silently ignored.
 
 
+strchars({expr})					*strchars()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of characters
+		String {expr} occupies.  Composing characters are counted
+		separately.
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
+
+strdisplaywidth({expr}[, {col}])			*strdisplaywidth()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
+		String {expr} occupies on the screen.
+		When {col} is omitted zero is used.  Otherwise it is the
+		screen column where to start.  This matters for Tab
+		characters.
+		The option settings of the current window are used.  This
+		matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as
+		'tabstop' and 'display'.
+		When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
+		Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|.
+
 strftime({format} [, {time}])				*strftime()*
 		The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as
 		specified by the {format} string.  The given {time} is used,
@@ -5279,7 +5488,8 @@ strlen({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the length of the String
 <
 		If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String.
 		For other types an error is given.
-		Also see |len()|.
+		Also see |len()|, |strchars()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and
+		|strwidth()|.
 
 strpart({src}, {start}[, {len}])			*strpart()*
 		The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from
@@ -5322,6 +5532,14 @@ strtrans({expr})					*strtrans()*
 <		This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of
 		starting a new line.
 
+strwidth({expr})					*strwidth()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
+		String {expr} occupies.  A Tab character is counted as one
+		cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|.
+		When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
+		Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
+		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|.
+
 submatch({nr})						*submatch()*
 		Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command.  Returns
 		the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text.  When {nr} is 0
@@ -5373,6 +5591,7 @@ synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans})				*synID()*
 		Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): >
 			:echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name")
 <
+
 synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])			*synIDattr()*
 		The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of
 		syntax ID {synID}.  This can be used to obtain information
@@ -5388,6 +5607,8 @@ synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])			*synIDattr()*
 				the color, cterm: color number as a string,
 				term: empty string)
 		"bg"		background color (as with "fg")
+		"font"		font name (only available in the GUI)
+				|highlight-font|
 		"sp"		special color (as with "fg") |highlight-guisp|
 		"fg#"		like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is
 				running the name in "#RRGGBB" form
@@ -5397,6 +5618,7 @@ synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}])			*synIDattr()*
 		"italic"	"1" if italic
 		"reverse"	"1" if reverse
 		"inverse"	"1" if inverse (= reverse)
+		"standout"	"1" if standout
 		"underline"	"1" if underlined
 		"undercurl"	"1" if undercurled
 
@@ -5410,6 +5632,20 @@ synIDtrans({synID})					*synIDtrans()*
 		highlight the character.  Highlight links given with
 		":highlight link" are followed.
 
+synconcealed({lnum}, {col})				*synconcealed()*
+		The result is a List. The first item in the list is 0 if the
+		character at the position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a
+		concealable region, 1 if it is. The second item in the list is
+		a string. If the first item is 1, the second item contains the
+		text which will be displayed in place of the concealed text,
+		depending on the current setting of 'conceallevel'. The third
+		and final item in the list is a unique number representing the
+		specific syntax region matched. This allows detection of the
+		beginning of a new concealable region if there are two
+		consecutive regions with the same replacement character.
+		For an example use see $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/2html.vim .
+
+
 synstack({lnum}, {col})					*synstack()*
 		Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the
 		position {lnum} and {col} in the current window.  Each item in
@@ -5423,6 +5659,10 @@ synstack({lnum}, {col})					*synstack()*
 			for id in synstack(line("."), col("."))
 			   echo synIDattr(id, "name")
 			endfor
+<		When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid
+		nothing is returned.  The position just after the last
+		character in a line and the first column in an empty line are
+		valid positions.
 
 system({expr} [, {input}])				*system()* *E677*
 		Get the output of the shell command {expr}.
@@ -5484,7 +5724,7 @@ tabpagenr([{arg}])					*tabpagenr()*
 
 
 tabpagewinnr({tabarg}, [{arg}])				*tabpagewinnr()*
-		Like |winnr()| but for tab page {arg}.
+		Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}.
 		{tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used.
 		{arg} is used like with |winnr()|:
 		- When omitted the current window number is returned.  This is
@@ -5548,6 +5788,31 @@ tempname()					*tempname()* *temp-file-name*
 		For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash'
 		option is set or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-'.
 
+
+tan({expr})						*tan()*
+		Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|
+		in the range [-inf, inf].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo tan(10)
+<			0.648361 >
+			:echo tan(-4.01)
+<			-1.181502
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+tanh({expr})						*tanh()*
+		Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the
+		range [-1, 1].
+		{expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+		Examples: >
+			:echo tanh(0.5)
+<			0.462117 >
+			:echo tanh(-1)
+<			-0.761594
+		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
 tolower({expr})						*tolower()*
 		The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase
 		characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to
@@ -5601,6 +5866,60 @@ type({expr})	The result is a Number, depending on the type of {expr}:
 			:if type(myvar) == type({})
 			:if type(myvar) == type(0.0)
 
+undofile({name})					*undofile()*
+		Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file
+		with name {name} when writing.  This uses the 'undodir'
+		option, finding directories that exist.  It does not check if
+		the undo file exists.
+		{name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what
+		is used internally.
+		Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|.
+		When compiled without the +persistent_undo option this always
+		returns an empty string.
+
+undotree()						*undotree()*
+		Return the current state of the undo tree in a dictionary with
+		the following items:
+		  "seq_last"	The highest undo sequence number used.
+		  "seq_cur"	The sequence number of the current position in
+				the undo tree.  This differs from "seq_last"
+				when some changes were undone.
+		  "time_cur"	Time last used for |:earlier| and related
+				commands.  Use |strftime()| to convert to
+				something readable.
+		  "save_last"	Number of the last file write.  Zero when no
+				write yet.
+		  "save_cur"	Number of the current position in the undo
+				tree.  
+		  "synced"	Non-zero when the last undo block was synced.
+				This happens when waiting from input from the
+				user.  See |undo-blocks|.
+		  "entries"	A list of dictionaries with information about
+				undo blocks.
+
+		The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item.
+		Each List item is a Dictionary with these items:
+		  "seq"		Undo sequence number.  Same as what appears in
+				|:undolist|.
+		  "time"	Timestamp when the change happened.  Use
+				|strftime()| to convert to something readable.
+		  "newhead"	Only appears in the item that is the last one
+				that was added.  This marks the last change
+				and where further changes will be added.
+		  "curhead"	Only appears in the item that is the last one
+				that was undone.  This marks the current
+				position in the undo tree, the block that will
+				be used by a redo command.  When nothing was
+				undone after the last change this item will
+				not appear anywhere.
+		  "save"	Only appears on the last block before a file
+				write.  The number is the write count.  The
+				first write has number 1, the last one the
+				"save_last" mentioned above.
+		  "alt"		Alternate entry.  This is again a List of undo
+				blocks.  Each item may again have an "alt"
+				item.
+
 values({dict})						*values()*
 		Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}.	The |List| is
 		in arbitrary order.
@@ -5864,6 +6183,7 @@ lispindent		Compiled with support for lisp indenting.
 listcmds		Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files|
 			and the argument list |arglist|.
 localmap		Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local|
+lua			Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|.
 mac			Macintosh version of Vim.
 macunix			Macintosh version of Vim, using Unix files (OS-X).
 menu			Compiled with support for |:menu|.
@@ -5883,12 +6203,13 @@ multi_byte_ime		Compiled with support for IME input method.
 multi_lang		Compiled with support for multiple languages.
 mzscheme		Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|.
 netbeans_intg		Compiled with support for |netbeans|.
-netbeans_enabled	Compiled with support for |netbeans| and it's used.
+netbeans_enabled	Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected.
 ole			Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32.
 os2			OS/2 version of Vim.
 osfiletype		Compiled with support for osfiletypes |+osfiletype|
 path_extra		Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
 perl			Compiled with Perl interface.
+persistent_undo		Compiled with support for persistent undo history.
 postscript		Compiled with PostScript file printing.
 printer			Compiled with |:hardcopy| support.
 profile			Compiled with |:profile| support.
@@ -5929,7 +6250,7 @@ toolbar			Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|.
 unix			Unix version of Vim.
 user_commands		User-defined commands.
 viminfo			Compiled with viminfo support.
-vim_starting		True while initial source'ing takes place.
+vim_starting		True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup|
 vertsplit		Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|.
 virtualedit		Compiled with 'virtualedit' option.
 visual			Compiled with Visual mode.
@@ -6454,7 +6775,8 @@ This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".
 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] -= {expr1}
 			Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each
 			|List| item.
-							*E106*
+
+								*E121*
 :let {var-name}	..	List the value of variable {var-name}.	Multiple
 			variable names may be given.  Special names recognized
 			here:				*E738*
@@ -6825,14 +7147,16 @@ This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".
 <
 							*:exe* *:execute*
 :exe[cute] {expr1} ..	Executes the string that results from the evaluation
-			of {expr1} as an Ex command.  Multiple arguments are
-			concatenated, with a space in between.	{expr1} is
-			used as the processed command, command line editing
-			keys are not recognized.
+			of {expr1} as an Ex command.
+			Multiple arguments are concatenated, with a space in
+			between.  To avoid the extra space use the "."
+			operator to concatenate strings into one argument.
+			{expr1} is used as the processed command, command line
+			editing keys are not recognized.
 			Cannot be followed by a comment.
 			Examples: >
-		:execute "buffer " nextbuf
-		:execute "normal " count . "w"
+		:execute "buffer" nextbuf
+		:execute "normal" count . "w"
 <
 			":execute" can be used to append a command to commands
 			that don't accept a '|'.  Example: >
@@ -7980,11 +8304,11 @@ missing: >
 ==============================================================================
 11. The sandbox					*eval-sandbox* *sandbox* *E48*
 
-The 'foldexpr', 'includeexpr', 'indentexpr', 'statusline' and 'foldtext'
-options are evaluated in a sandbox.  This means that you are protected from
-these expressions having nasty side effects.  This gives some safety for when
-these options are set from a modeline.	It is also used when the command from
-a tags file is executed and for CTRL-R = in the command line.
+The 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr', 'includeexpr', 'indentexpr', 'statusline' and
+'foldtext' options may be evaluated in a sandbox.  This means that you are
+protected from these expressions having nasty side effects.  This gives some
+safety for when these options are set from a modeline.  It is also used when
+the command from a tags file is executed and for CTRL-R = in the command line.
 The sandbox is also used for the |:sandbox| command.
 
 These items are not allowed in the sandbox:

runtime/doc/evim-it.1

@@ -17,10 +17,10 @@ e imposta le opzioni per farlo comportare come un editore "modeless".
 State sempre usando Vim, ma come un editore "posizionati-e-clicca".
 Simile all'uso di Notepad in MS-Windows.
 .B evim
-richiede la presenza della GUI, per avere a disposizione menu e barra
+richiede la presenza della GUI, per avere a disposizione men<EFBFBD> e barra
 strumenti.
 .PP
-Da usarsi solo da parte di chi non <20> in grado di lavorare con Vim nella
+Da usarsi soltanto se non si <EFBFBD> in grado di lavorare con Vim nella
 maniera usuale.
 La modifica file sar<61> molto meno efficiente.
 .PP
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ L'opzione 'insertmode'
 Sono definite delle mappature che consentono di usare COPIA e INCOLLA con i
 familiari tasti usati sotto MS-Windows.
 CTRL-X taglia testo, CTRL-C copia testo e CTRL-V incolla testo.
-Usate CTRL-Q per ottenere quello chs si ottierrebbe con CTRL-V in Vim nativo.
+Usate CTRL-Q per ottenere quello che si otterrebbe con CTRL-V in Vim nativo.
 .SH OPZIONI
 Vedere vim(1).
 .SH FILE
@@ -51,4 +51,4 @@ vim(1)
 Buona parte di
 .B Vim
 <EFBFBD> stato scritto da Bram Moolenaar, con molto aiuto da altri.
-Vedere il Menu "Aiuto/Crediti".
+Vedere il men<EFBFBD> "Aiuto/Crediti".

runtime/doc/evim-it.UTF-8.1

@@ -17,10 +17,10 @@ e imposta le opzioni per farlo comportare come un editore "modeless".
 State sempre usando Vim, ma come un editore "posizionati-e-clicca".
 Simile all'uso di Notepad in MS-Windows.
 .B evim
-richiede la presenza della GUI, per avere a disposizione menu e barra
+richiede la presenza della GUI, per avere a disposizione menù e barra
 strumenti.
 .PP
-Da usarsi solo da parte di chi non è in grado di lavorare con Vim nella
+Da usarsi soltanto se non si è in grado di lavorare con Vim nella
 maniera usuale.
 La modifica file sarà molto meno efficiente.
 .PP
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ L'opzione 'insertmode' è impostata per poter immettere del testo direttamente.
 Sono definite delle mappature che consentono di usare COPIA e INCOLLA con i
 familiari tasti usati sotto MS-Windows.
 CTRL-X taglia testo, CTRL-C copia testo e CTRL-V incolla testo.
-Usate CTRL-Q per ottenere quello chs si ottierrebbe con CTRL-V in Vim nativo.
+Usate CTRL-Q per ottenere quello che si otterrebbe con CTRL-V in Vim nativo.
 .SH OPZIONI
 Vedere vim(1).
 .SH FILE
@@ -51,4 +51,4 @@ vim(1)
 Buona parte di
 .B Vim
 è stato scritto da Bram Moolenaar, con molto aiuto da altri.
-Vedere il Menu "Aiuto/Crediti".
+Vedere il menù "Aiuto/Crediti".

runtime/doc/farsi.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*farsi.txt*     For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*farsi.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Mortaza Ghassab Shiran
@@ -62,8 +62,8 @@ o  Toggling between Farsi ISIR-3342 standard encoding and Vim Farsi via F9
 Farsi Fonts					*farsi fonts*
 -----------
 
-If the "extra" archive has been unpacked, the following files are found in the
-subdirectories of the '$VIM/farsi' directory:
+The following files are found in the subdirectories of the '$VIM/farsi/fonts'
+directory:
 
    +  far-a01.pcf    X Windows fonts for Unix including Linux systems
    +  far-a01.bf     X Windows fonts for SunOS

runtime/doc/filetype.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Jul 15
+*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Jul 15
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/fold.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*fold.txt*      For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Dec 22
+*fold.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 May 13
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ You can find an introduction on folding in chapter 28 of the user manual.
 4. Behavior of folds	|fold-behavior|
 
 {Vi has no Folding}
-{not available when compiled without the +folding feature}
+{not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Fold methods					*fold-methods*
@@ -127,6 +127,9 @@ fold level.  But note that foldlevel() may return -1 if the level is not known
 yet.  And it returns the level at the start of the line, while a fold might
 end in that line.
 
+It may happened that folds are not updated properly.  You can use |zx| or |zX|
+to force updating folds.
+
 
 SYNTAX						*fold-syntax*
 
@@ -274,7 +277,7 @@ zf{motion}  or
 		Also see |fold-create-marker|.
 
 							*zF*
-zF		Create a fold for N lines.  Works like "zf".
+zF		Create a fold for [count] lines.  Works like "zf".
 
 :{range}fo[ld]						*:fold* *:fo*
 		Create a fold for the lines in {range}.  Works like "zf".
@@ -352,9 +355,13 @@ zv		View cursor line: Open just enough folds to make the line in
 							*zx*
 zx		Update folds: Undo manually opened and closed folds: re-apply
 		'foldlevel', then do "zv": View cursor line.
+		Also forces recomputing folds.  This is useful when using
+		'foldexpr' and the buffer is changed in a way that results in
+		folds not to be updated properly.
 
 							*zX*
 zX		Undo manually opened and closed folds: re-apply 'foldlevel'.
+		Also forces recomputing folds, like |zx|.
 
 							*zm*
 zm		Fold more: Subtract one from 'foldlevel'.  If 'foldlevel' was
@@ -399,24 +406,24 @@ MOVING OVER FOLDS ~
 [z		Move to the start of the current open fold.  If already at the
 		start, move to the start of the fold that contains it.  If
 		there is no containing fold, the command fails.
-		When a count is used, repeats the command N times.
+		When a count is used, repeats the command [count] times.
 
 							*]z*
 ]z		Move to the end of the current open fold.  If already at the
 		end, move to the end of the fold that contains it.  If there
 		is no containing fold, the command fails.
-		When a count is used, repeats the command N times.
+		When a count is used, repeats the command [count] times.
 
 							*zj*
 zj		Move downwards to the start of the next fold.  A closed fold
 		is counted as one fold.
-		When a count is used, repeats the command N times.
+		When a count is used, repeats the command [count] times.
 		This command can be used after an |operator|.
 
 							*zk*
 zk		Move upwards to the end of the previous fold.  A closed fold
 		is counted as one fold.
-		When a count is used, repeats the command N times.
+		When a count is used, repeats the command [count] times.
 		This command can be used after an |operator|.
 
 

runtime/doc/ft_ada.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*ft_ada.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Jun 21
+*ft_ada.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
 
 
 		    ADA FILE TYPE PLUG-INS REFERENCE MANUAL~
@@ -6,20 +6,20 @@
 ADA								      *ada.vim*
 
 1.  Syntax Highlighting			    |ft-ada-syntax|
-2.  Plug-in				    |ft-ada-plugin|
+2.  File type Plug-in			    |ft-ada-plugin|
 3.  Omni Completion			    |ft-ada-omni|
     3.1 Omni Completion with "gnat xref"	|gnat-xref|
     3.2 Omni Completion with "ctags"		|ada-ctags|
 4.  Compiler Support			    |ada-compiler|
     4.1 GNAT					|compiler-gnat|
-    4.1 Dec Ada					|compiler-decada|
+    4.2 Dec Ada					|compiler-decada|
 5.  References				    |ada-reference|
     5.1 Options					|ft-ada-options|
-    5.2 Functions				|ft-ada-functions|
-    5.3 Commands				|ft-ada-commands|
-    5.4 Variables				|ft-ada-variables|
-    5.5 Constants				|ft-ada-constants|
-8.  Extra Plug-ins			    |ada-extra-plugins|
+    5.2 Commands				|ft-ada-commands|
+    5.3 Variables				|ft-ada-variables|
+    5.4 Constants				|ft-ada-constants|
+    5.5 Functions				|ft-ada-functions|
+6.  Extra Plug-ins			    |ada-extra-plugins|
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Syntax Highlighting ~
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ to change how loops are displayed, enter the command ":hi Repeat" followed by
 the colour specification; on simple terminals the colour specification
 ctermfg=White often shows well).
 
-There are several options you can select in this Ada mode. See|ft-ada-options|
+There are several options you can select in this Ada mode. See |ft-ada-options|
 for a complete list.
 
 To enable them, assign a value to the option.  For example, to turn one on:
@@ -139,11 +139,11 @@ The Ada parser for Exuberant Ctags is fairly new - don't expect complete
 support yet.
 
 ==============================================================================
-4.  Compiler Support ~
+4. Compiler Support ~
 								*ada-compiler*
 
 The Ada mode supports more than one Ada compiler and will automatically load the
-compiler set in|g:ada_default_compiler|whenever an Ada source is opened. The
+compiler set in |g:ada_default_compiler| whenever an Ada source is opened. The
 provided compiler plug-ins are split into the actual compiler plug-in and a
 collection of support functions and variables. This allows the easy
 development of specialized compiler plug-ins fine tuned to your development
@@ -171,20 +171,20 @@ GNAT OBJECT ~
 
 							       *g:gnat.Make()*
 g:gnat.Make()
-		Calls|g:gnat.Make_Command|and displays the result inside a
+		Calls |g:gnat.Make_Command| and displays the result inside a
                |quickfix| window.
 
 							     *g:gnat.Pretty()*
 g:gnat.Pretty()
-		Calls|g:gnat.Pretty_Command|
+		Calls |g:gnat.Pretty_Program|
 
 							       *g:gnat.Find()*
 g:gnat.Find()
-		Calls|g:gnat.Find_Command|
+		Calls |g:gnat.Find_Program|
 
 							       *g:gnat.Tags()*
 g:gnat.Tags()
-		Calls|g:gnat.Tags_Command|
+		Calls |g:gnat.Tags_Command|
 
 						   *g:gnat.Set_Project_File()*
 g:gnat.Set_Project_File([{file}])
@@ -200,19 +200,19 @@ g:gnat.Project_File	string
 
 							 *g:gnat.Make_Command*
 g:gnat.Make_Command	string
-		External command used for|g:gnat.Make()| (|'makeprg'|).
+		External command used for |g:gnat.Make()| (|'makeprg'|).
 
 						       *g:gnat.Pretty_Program*
 g:gnat.Pretty_Program	string
-		External command used for|g:gnat.Pretty()|
+		External command used for |g:gnat.Pretty()|
 
 							 *g:gnat.Find_Program*
 g:gnat.Find_Program	string
-		External command used for|g:gnat.Find()|
+		External command used for |g:gnat.Find()|
 
 							 *g:gnat.Tags_Command*
 g:gnat.Tags_Command	string
-		External command used for|g:gnat.Tags()|
+		External command used for |g:gnat.Tags()|
 
 							 *g:gnat.Error_Format*
 g:gnat.Error_Format	string
@@ -237,8 +237,8 @@ DEC ADA OBJECT ~
 
 							     *g:decada.Make()*
 g:decada.Make()		function
-		Calls|g:decada.Make_Command|and displays the result inside a
-               |quickfix| window.
+		Calls |g:decada.Make_Command| and displays the result inside a
+		|quickfix| window.
 
 							*g:decada.Unit_Name()*
 g:decada.Unit_Name()	function
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ g:decada.Unit_Name()	function
 
 						       *g:decada.Make_Command*
 g:decada.Make_Command	string
-		External command used for|g:decadat.Make()| (|'makeprg'|).
+		External command used for |g:decada.Make()| (|'makeprg'|).
 
 						       *g:decada.Error_Format*
 g:decada.Error_Format|	string
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ false when the variable is undefined. The value to which the variable is set
 makes no difference.
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-5.3 Commands ~
+5.2 Commands ~
 							     *ft-ada-commands*
 
 :AdaRainbow							 *:AdaRainbow*
@@ -406,15 +406,15 @@ makes no difference.
 g:gnat			    object
 		Control object which manages GNAT compiles.  The object
 		is created when the first Ada source code is loaded provided
-		that |g:ada_default_compiler|is set to 'gnat'. See|gnat_members|
-		for details.
+		that |g:ada_default_compiler| is set to 'gnat'. See
+		|gnat_members| for details.
 
 								    *g:decada*
 g:decada		      object
 		Control object which manages Dec Ada compiles.	The object
 		is created when the first Ada source code is loaded provided
-		that |g:ada_default_compiler|is set to 'decada'. See
-	       |decada_members|for details.
+		that |g:ada_default_compiler| is set to 'decada'. See
+		|decada_members| for details.
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 5.4 Constants ~
@@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ g:ada#Ctags_Kinds	dictionary of lists
 		for Ctags generates.
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-5.2 Functions ~
+5.5 Functions ~
 							    *ft-ada-functions*
 
 ada#Word([{line}, {col}])					  *ada#Word()*
@@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ gnat#New ()
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-8. Extra Plugins ~
+6. Extra Plugins ~
 							   *ada-extra-plugins*
 
 You can optionally install the following extra plug-ins. They work well with

runtime/doc/ft_sql.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*sql.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Nov 03
+*ft_sql.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
 
 by David Fishburn
 
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Press any of the following keys: >
 						*sqlanywhere*
 						*oracle* *plsql* *sqlj*
 						*sqlserver*
-						*mysql* *postgress* *psql*
+						*mysql* *postgresql* *psql*
 						*informix*
 
 All relational databases support SQL.  There is a portion of SQL that is
@@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ Example of using column completion:
        completion window is active.  If the completion popup window is
        not active, a normal <Right> or <Left> will be executed.
 
-Lets look how we can build a SQL statement dynamically.  A select statement
+Let's look at how we can build a SQL statement dynamically.  A select statement
 requires a list of columns.  There are two ways to build a column list using
 the SQL completion plugin. >
     One column at a time:
@@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ your |vimrc|: >
 		   MYTABLENAME --> M
 
     omni_sql_ignorecase
-<	- Default: Current setting for|ignorecase|
+<	- Default: Current setting for 'ignorecase'
 	- Valid settings are 0 or 1.
 	- When entering a few letters before initiating completion, the list
 	  will be filtered to display only the entries which begin with the
@@ -738,8 +738,8 @@ platform you can also use <C-Space> or ALT keys.
 
 Many times SQL can be used with different filetypes.  For example Perl, Java,
 PHP, Javascript can all interact with a database.  Often you need both the SQL
-completion as well as the completion capabilities for the current language you
-are editing.
+completion and the completion capabilities for the current language you are
+editing.
 
 This can be enabled easily with the following steps (assuming a Perl file): >
     1.  :e test.pl

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Jan 22
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 May 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ some modes:
 	mode		inserted	appended	~
 	Normal		nothing		nothing
 	Visual		<C-C>		<C-\><C-G>
-	Insert		<C-O>
+	Insert		<C-\><C-O>
 	Cmdline		<C-C>		<C-\><C-G>
 	Op-pending	<C-C>		<C-\><C-G>
 
@@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ is equal to: >
 
    :nmenu File.Next	:next^M
    :vmenu File.Next	^C:next^M^\^G
-   :imenu File.Next	^O:next^M
+   :imenu File.Next	^\^O:next^M
    :cmenu File.Next	^C:next^M^\^G
    :omenu File.Next	^C:next^M^\^G
 
@@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ and Photon GUI.  It should turn up in other GUIs in due course.  The
 default toolbar is setup in menu.vim.
 The display of the toolbar is controlled by the 'guioptions' letter 'T'.  You
 can thus have menu & toolbar together, or either on its own, or neither.
-The appearance is controlled by the 'toolbar' option.  You can chose between
+The appearance is controlled by the 'toolbar' option.  You can choose between
 an image, text or both.
 
 							*toolbar-icon*

runtime/doc/gui_w16.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w16.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*gui_w16.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2007 Aug 30
+*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2007 Aug 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Oct 28
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -453,14 +453,12 @@ searched for.  If all three fail, the GUI will be disabled.
 For GTK+, Vim's configuration process requires that GTK+ be properly
 installed.  That is, the shell script 'gtk-config' must be in your PATH, and
 you can already successful compile, build, and execute a GTK+ program.  The
-reason for this is because the compiler flags (CFLAGS) and link flags
-(LDFLAGS) are obtained through the 'gtk-config' shell script.
+reason for this is that the compiler flags (CFLAGS) and link flags (LDFLAGS)
+are obtained through the 'gtk-config' shell script.
 
 If you want to build with GTK+ 2 support pass the --enable-gtk2-check argument
 to ./configure.  Optionally, support for GNOME 2 will be compiled if the
---enable-gnome-check option is also given.  Note that the support for GTK+ 2
-is still experimental.  However, many people have reported that it works just
-fine for them.
+--enable-gnome-check option is also given.
 
 Otherwise, if you are using Motif or Athena, when you have the Motif or Athena
 files in a directory where configure doesn't look, edit the Makefile to enter
@@ -468,15 +466,12 @@ the names of the directories.  Search for "GUI_INC_LOC" for an example to set
 the Motif directories, "CONF_OPT_X" for Athena.
 
 							*gui-x11-gtk*
-At the time of this writing, you may use either GTK+ version 1.0.6 or 1.2.  It
-is suggested that you use v1.2 since not all of Vim's GUI features are present
-if using v1.0.6.  For instance, there are no tearoff menus present in v1.0.6.
-Using a version from GTK+'s CVS tree may or may not work, and is therefore not
-supported and not recommended.
+At the time of this writing, GTK+ version 1.0.6 and 1.2 are outdated.  It
+is suggested that you use GTK 2.  The GTK 1 support will most likely be
+dropped soon.
 
-For the experimental GTK+ 2 GUI, using the latest release of the GTK+ 2.0 or
-GTK+ 2.2 series is recommended.  CVS HEAD seems to work fine most of time as
-well.
+For the GTK+ 2 GUI, using the latest release of the GTK+ 2.0 or GTK+ 2.2
+series is recommended.
 
 Lastly, although GTK+ has supposedly been ported to the Win32 platform, this
 has not been tested with Vim and is also unsupported.  Also, it's unlikely to

runtime/doc/hangulin.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*hangulin.txt*  For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Jun 24
+*hangulin.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2009 Jun 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Chi-Deok Hwang and Sung-Hyun Nam

runtime/doc/hebrew.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*hebrew.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2007 Jun 14
+*hebrew.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2007 Jun 14
 
 
 	   VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ron Aaron (and Avner Lottem)

runtime/doc/help.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Jul 21
+*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
 
 			VIM - main help file
 									 k
@@ -26,6 +26,7 @@ Get specific help:  It is possible to go directly to whatever you want help
 		      Option			  '	   :help 'textwidth'
   Search for help:  Type ":help word", then hit CTRL-D to see matching
 		    help entries for "word".
+		    Or use ":helpgrep word". |:helpgrep|
 
 VIM stands for Vi IMproved.  Most of VIM was made by Bram Moolenaar, but only
 through the help of many others.  See |credits|.
@@ -90,6 +91,7 @@ REFERENCE MANUAL: These files explain every detail of Vim.	*reference_toc*
 General subjects ~
 |intro.txt|	general introduction to Vim; notation used in help files
 |help.txt|	overview and quick reference (this file)
+|helphelp.txt|	about using the help files
 |index.txt|	alphabetical index of all commands
 |help-tags|	all the tags you can jump to (index of tags)
 |howto.txt|	how to do the most common editing tasks
@@ -156,6 +158,7 @@ GUI ~
 
 Interfaces ~
 |if_cscop.txt|	using Cscope with Vim
+|if_lua.txt|	Lua interface
 |if_mzsch.txt|	MzScheme interface
 |if_perl.txt|	Perl interface
 |if_pyth.txt|	Python interface
@@ -208,10 +211,11 @@ Now that you've jumped here with CTRL-] or a double mouse click, you can use
 CTRL-T, CTRL-O, g<RightMouse>, or <C-RightMouse> to go back to where you were.
 
 Note that tags are within | characters, but when highlighting is enabled these
-are hidden.  That makes it easier to read a command.
+characters are hidden.  That makes it easier to read a command.
 
 Anyway, you can use CTRL-] on any word, also when it is not within |, and Vim
-will try to find help for it.
+will try to find help for it.  Especially for options in single quotes, e.g.
+'compatible'.
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  vim:tw=78:fo=tcq2:isk=!-~,^*,^\|,^\":ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/helphelp.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,349 @@
+*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 14
+
+
+		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
+
+
+Help on help files					*helphelp*
+
+1. Help commands		|online-help|
+2. Translated help files	|help-translated|
+3. Writing help files		|help-writing|
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Help commands					*online-help*
+
+			*help* *<Help>* *:h* *:help* *<F1>* *i_<F1>* *i_<Help>*
+<Help>		or
+:h[elp]			Open a window and display the help file in read-only
+			mode.  If there is a help window open already, use
+			that one.  Otherwise, if the current window uses the
+			full width of the screen or is at least 80 characters
+			wide, the help window will appear just above the
+			current window.  Otherwise the new window is put at
+			the very top.
+			The 'helplang' option is used to select a language, if
+			the main help file is available in several languages.
+			{not in Vi}
+
+						*{subject}* *E149* *E661*
+:h[elp] {subject}	Like ":help", additionally jump to the tag {subject}.
+			{subject} can include wildcards like "*", "?" and
+			"[a-z]":
+			   :help z?	jump to help for any "z" command
+			   :help z.	jump to the help for "z."
+			If there is no full match for the pattern, or there
+			are several matches, the "best" match will be used.
+			A sophisticated algorithm is used to decide which
+			match is better than another one.  These items are
+			considered in the computation:
+			- A match with same case is much better than a match
+			  with different case.
+			- A match that starts after a non-alphanumeric
+			  character is better than a match in the middle of a
+			  word.
+			- A match at or near the beginning of the tag is
+			  better than a match further on.
+			- The more alphanumeric characters match, the better.
+			- The shorter the length of the match, the better.
+
+			The 'helplang' option is used to select a language, if
+			the {subject} is available in several languages.
+			To find a tag in a specific language, append "@ab",
+			where "ab" is the two-letter language code.  See
+			|help-translated|.
+
+			Note that the longer the {subject} you give, the less
+			matches will be found.  You can get an idea how this
+			all works by using commandline completion (type CTRL-D
+			after ":help subject" |c_CTRL-D|).
+			If there are several matches, you can have them listed
+			by hitting CTRL-D.  Example: >
+				:help cont<Ctrl-D>
+
+<			Instead of typing ":help CTRL-V" to search for help
+			for CTRL-V you can type: >
+				:help ^V
+<			This also works together with other characters, for
+			example to find help for CTRL-V in Insert mode: >
+				:help i^V
+<
+			To use a regexp |pattern|, first do ":help" and then
+			use ":tag {pattern}" in the help window.  The
+			":tnext" command can then be used to jump to other
+			matches, "tselect" to list matches and choose one. >
+				:help index| :tse z.
+
+<			When there is no argument you will see matches for
+			"help", to avoid listing all possible matches (that
+			would be very slow).
+			The number of matches displayed is limited to 300.
+
+			This command can be followed by '|' and another
+			command, but you don't need to escape the '|' inside a
+			help command.  So these both work: >
+				:help |
+				:help k| only
+<			Note that a space before the '|' is seen as part of
+			the ":help" argument.
+			You can also use <LF> or <CR> to separate the help
+			command from a following command.  You need to type
+			CTRL-V first to insert the <LF> or <CR>.  Example: >
+				:help so<C-V><CR>only
+<			{not in Vi}
+
+:h[elp]! [subject]	Like ":help", but in non-English help files prefer to
+			find a tag in a file with the same language as the
+			current file.  See |help-translated|.
+
+							*:helpg* *:helpgrep*
+:helpg[rep] {pattern}[@xx]
+			Search all help text files and make a list of lines
+			in which {pattern} matches.  Jumps to the first match.
+			The optional [@xx] specifies that only matches in the
+			"xx" language are to be found.
+			You can navigate through the matches with the
+			|quickfix| commands, e.g., |:cnext| to jump to the
+			next one.  Or use |:cwindow| to get the list of
+			matches in the quickfix window.
+			{pattern} is used as a Vim regexp |pattern|.
+			'ignorecase' is not used, add "\c" to ignore case.
+			Example for case sensitive search: >
+				:helpgrep Uganda
+<			Example for case ignoring search: >
+				:helpgrep uganda\c
+<			Example for searching in French help: >
+				:helpgrep backspace@fr
+<			The pattern does not support line breaks, it must
+			match within one line.  You can use |:grep| instead,
+			but then you need to get the list of help files in a
+			complicated way.
+			Cannot be followed by another command, everything is
+			used as part of the pattern.  But you can use
+			|:execute| when needed.
+			Compressed help files will not be searched (Fedora
+			compresses the help files).
+			{not in Vi}
+
+							*:lh* *:lhelpgrep*
+:lh[elpgrep] {pattern}[@xx]
+			Same as ":helpgrep", except the location list is used
+			instead of the quickfix list.  If the help window is
+			already opened, then the location list for that window
+			is used.  Otherwise, a new help window is opened and
+			the location list for that window is set.  The
+			location list for the current window is not changed.
+
+							*:exu* *:exusage*
+:exu[sage]		Show help on Ex commands.  Added to simulate the Nvi
+			command. {not in Vi}
+
+							*:viu* *:viusage*
+:viu[sage]		Show help on Normal mode commands.  Added to simulate
+			the Nvi command. {not in Vi}
+
+When no argument is given to |:help| the file given with the 'helpfile' option
+will be opened.  Otherwise the specified tag is searched for in all "doc/tags"
+files in the directories specified in the 'runtimepath' option.
+
+The initial height of the help window can be set with the 'helpheight' option
+(default 20).
+
+Jump to specific subjects by using tags.  This can be done in two ways:
+- Use the "CTRL-]" command while standing on the name of a command or option.
+  This only works when the tag is a keyword.  "<C-Leftmouse>" and
+  "g<LeftMouse>" work just like "CTRL-]".
+- use the ":ta {subject}" command.  This also works with non-keyword
+  characters.
+
+Use CTRL-T or CTRL-O to jump back.
+Use ":q" to close the help window.
+
+If there are several matches for an item you are looking for, this is how you
+can jump to each one of them:
+1. Open a help window
+2. Use the ":tag" command with a slash prepended to the tag.  E.g.: >
+	:tag /min
+3. Use ":tnext" to jump to the next matching tag.
+
+It is possible to add help files for plugins and other items.  You don't need
+to change the distributed help files for that.  See |add-local-help|.
+
+To write a local help file, see |write-local-help|.
+
+Note that the title lines from the local help files are automagically added to
+the "LOCAL ADDITIONS" section in the "help.txt" help file |local-additions|.
+This is done when viewing the file in Vim, the file itself is not changed.  It
+is done by going through all help files and obtaining the first line of each
+file.  The files in $VIMRUNTIME/doc are skipped.
+
+							*help-xterm-window*
+If you want to have the help in another xterm window, you could use this
+command: >
+	:!xterm -e vim +help &
+<
+
+			*:helpfind* *:helpf*
+:helpf[ind]		Like |:help|, but use a dialog to enter the argument.
+			Only for backwards compatibility.  It now executes the
+			ToolBar.FindHelp menu entry instead of using a builtin
+			dialog.  {only when compiled with |+GUI_GTK|}
+			{not in Vi}
+
+					*:helpt* *:helptags*
+				*E154* *E150* *E151* *E152* *E153* *E670*
+:helpt[ags] [++t] {dir}
+			Generate the help tags file(s) for directory {dir}.
+			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory are
+			scanned for a help tag definition in between stars.
+			The "*.??x" files are for translated docs, they
+			generate the "tags-??" file, see |help-translated|.
+			The generated tags files are sorted.
+			When there are duplicates an error message is given.
+			An existing tags file is silently overwritten.
+			The optional "++t" argument forces adding the
+			"help-tags" tag.  This is also done when the {dir} is
+			equal to $VIMRUNTIME/doc.
+			To rebuild the help tags in the runtime directory
+			(requires write permission there): >
+				:helptags $VIMRUNTIME/doc
+<			{not in Vi}
+
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Translated help files				*help-translated*
+
+It is possible to add translated help files, next to the original English help
+files.  Vim will search for all help in "doc" directories in 'runtimepath'.
+This is only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| feature.
+
+At this moment translations are available for:
+	Chinese - multiple authors
+	French  - translated by David Blanchet
+	Italian - translated by Antonio Colombo
+	Polish  - translated by Mikolaj Machowski
+	Russian - translated by Vassily Ragosin
+See the Vim website to find them: http://www.vim.org/translations.php
+
+A set of translated help files consists of these files:
+
+	help.abx
+	howto.abx
+	...
+	tags-ab
+
+"ab" is the two-letter language code.  Thus for Italian the names are:
+
+	help.itx
+	howto.itx
+	...
+	tags-it
+
+The 'helplang' option can be set to the preferred language(s).  The default is
+set according to the environment.  Vim will first try to find a matching tag
+in the preferred language(s).  English is used when it cannot be found.
+
+To find a tag in a specific language, append "@ab" to a tag, where "ab" is the
+two-letter language code.  Example: >
+	:he user-manual@it
+	:he user-manual@en
+The first one finds the Italian user manual, even when 'helplang' is empty.
+The second one finds the English user manual, even when 'helplang' is set to
+"it".
+
+When using command-line completion for the ":help" command, the "@en"
+extension is only shown when a tag exists for multiple languages.  When the
+tag only exists for English "@en" is omitted.
+
+When using |CTRL-]| or ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will try to
+find the tag in the same language.  If not found then 'helplang' will be used
+to select a language.
+
+Help files must use latin1 or utf-8 encoding.  Vim assumes the encoding is
+utf-8 when finding non-ASCII characters in the first line.  Thus you must
+translate the header with "For Vim version".
+
+The same encoding must be used for the help files of one language in one
+directory.  You can use a different encoding for different languages and use
+a different encoding for help files of the same language but in a different
+directory.
+
+Hints for translators:
+- Do not translate the tags.  This makes it possible to use 'helplang' to
+  specify the preferred language.  You may add new tags in your language.
+- When you do not translate a part of a file, add tags to the English version,
+  using the "tag@en" notation.
+- Make a package with all the files and the tags file available for download.
+  Users can drop it in one of the "doc" directories and start use it.
+  Report this to Bram, so that he can add a link on www.vim.org.
+- Use the |:helptags| command to generate the tags files.  It will find all
+  languages in the specified directory.
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Writing help files					*help-writing*
+
+For ease of use, a Vim help file for a plugin should follow the format of the
+standard Vim help files.  If you are writing a new help file it's best to copy
+one of the existing files and use it as a template.
+
+The first line in a help file should have the following format:
+
+*helpfile_name.txt*	For Vim version 7.3	Last change: 2010 June 4
+
+The first field is a link to the help file name.  The second field describes
+the applicable Vim version.  The last field specifies the last modification
+date of the file.  Each field is separated by a tab.
+
+At the bottom of the help file, place a Vim modeline to set the 'textwidth'
+and 'tabstop' options and the 'filetype' to 'help'.  Never set a global option
+in such a modeline, that can have consequences undesired by whoever reads that
+help.
+
+
+TAGS
+
+To define a help tag, place the name between asterisks (*tag-name*).  The
+tag-name should be different from all the Vim help tag names and ideally
+should begin with the name of the Vim plugin.  The tag name is usually right
+aligned on a line.
+
+When referring to an existing help tag and to create a hot-link, place the
+name between two bars (|) eg. |help-writing|.
+
+When referring to a Vim option in the help file, place the option name between
+two single quotes, eg. 'statusline'
+
+
+HIGHLIGHTING
+
+To define a column heading, use a tilde character at the end of the line.
+This will highlight the column heading in a different color.  E.g.
+
+Column heading~
+
+To separate sections in a help file, place a series of '=' characters in a
+line starting from the first column.  The section separator line is highlighted
+differently.
+
+To quote a block of ex-commands verbatim, place a greater than (>) character
+at the end of the line before the block and a less than (<) character as the
+first non-blank on a line following the block.  Any line starting in column 1
+also implicitly stops the block of ex-commands before it.  E.g. >
+    function Example_Func()
+	echo "Example"
+    endfunction
+<
+
+The following are highlighted differently in a Vim help file:
+  - a special key name expressed either in <> notation as in <PageDown>, or
+    as a Ctrl character as in CTRL-X
+  - anything between {braces}, e.g. {lhs} and {rhs}
+
+The word "Note", "Notes" and similar automagically receive distinctive
+highlighting.  So do these:
+	*Todo	something to do
+	*Error	something wrong
+
+You can find the details in $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/help.vim
+
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/howto.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*howto.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2006 Apr 02
+*howto.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2006 Apr 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/if_cscop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Mar 18
+*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Andy Kahn
@@ -112,8 +112,7 @@ The available subcommands are:
 	    :cscope add /projects/vim/cscope.out /usr/local/vim
 	    :cscope add cscope.out /usr/local/vim -C
 <
-				      *cscope-find* *cs-find*
-						*E565* *E567*
+				      *cscope-find* *cs-find* *E567*
     find  : Query cscope.  All cscope query options are available
 	    except option #5 ("Change this grep pattern").
 
@@ -198,7 +197,7 @@ The available subcommands are:
 
 	    USAGE   :cs help
 
-						*E260* *E261*
+							*E261*
     kill  : Kill a cscope connection (or kill all cscope connections).
 
 	    USAGE   :cs kill {num|partial_name}

runtime/doc/if_lua.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 22
+
+
+		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Luis Carvalho
+
+
+The Lua Interface to Vim				*lua* *Lua*
+
+1. Commands			|lua-commands|
+2. The vim module		|lua-vim|
+3. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
+4. Window userdata		|lua-window|
+
+{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+
+The Lua interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the
+|+lua| feature.
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Commands						*lua-commands*
+
+							*:lua*
+:[range]lua {chunk}
+			Execute Lua chunk {chunk}.    {not in Vi}
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:lua print("Hello, Vim!")
+	:lua local curbuf = vim.buffer() curbuf[7] = "line #7"
+<
+
+:[range]lua << {endmarker}
+{script}
+{endmarker}
+			Execute Lua script {script}.  {not in Vi}
+			Note: This command doesn't work when the Lua
+			feature wasn't compiled in.  To avoid errors, see
+			|script-here|.
+
+{endmarker} must NOT be preceded by any white space.  If {endmarker} is
+omitted from after the "<<", a dot '.' must be used after {script}, like
+for the |:append| and |:insert| commands.
+This form of the |:lua| command is mainly useful for including Lua code
+in Vim scripts.
+
+Example:
+>
+	function! CurrentLineInfo()
+	lua << EOF
+	local linenr = vim.window().line
+	local curline = vim.buffer()[linenr]
+	print(string.format("Current line [%d] has %d chars",
+		linenr, #curline))
+	EOF
+	endfunction
+<
+
+							*:luado*
+:[range]luado {body}	Execute Lua function "function (line) {body} end" for
+			each line in the [range], with the function argument
+			being set to the text of each line in turn, without a
+			trailing <EOL>. If the value returned by the function
+			is a string it becomes the text of the line in the
+			current turn. The default for [range] is the whole
+			file: "1,$".		      {not in Vi}
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:luado return string.format("%s\t%d", line:reverse(), #line)
+
+	:lua require"lpeg"
+	:lua -- balanced parenthesis grammar:
+	:lua bp = lpeg.P{ "(" * ((1 - lpeg.S"()") + lpeg.V(1))^0 * ")" }
+	:luado if bp:match(line) then return "-->\t" .. line end
+<
+
+							*:luafile*
+:[range]luafile {file}
+			Execute Lua script in {file}. {not in Vi}
+			The whole argument is used as a single file name.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:luafile script.lua
+	:luafile %
+<
+
+All these commands execute a Lua chunk from either the command line (:lua and
+:luado) or a file (:luafile) with the given line [range]. Similarly to the Lua
+interpreter, each chunk has its own scope and so only global variables are
+shared between command calls. Lua default libraries "table", "string", "math",
+and "package" are available, "io" and "debug" are not, and "os" is restricted
+to functions "date", "clock", "time", "difftime", and "getenv". In addition,
+Lua "print" function has its output redirected to the Vim message area, with
+arguments separated by a white space instead of a tab.
+
+Lua uses the "vim" module (see |lua-vim|) to issue commands to Vim
+and manage buffers (|lua-buffer|) and windows (|lua-window|). However,
+procedures that alter buffer content, open new buffers, and change cursor
+position are restricted when the command is executed in the |sandbox|.
+
+
+==============================================================================
+2. The vim module					*lua-vim*
+
+Lua interfaces Vim through the "vim" module. The first and last line of the
+input range are stored in "vim.firstline" and "vim.lastline" respectively. The
+module also includes routines for buffer, window, and current line queries,
+Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
+
+	vim.isbuffer(value)	Returns 'true' (boolean, not string) if
+				"value" is a buffer userdata and 'false'
+				otherwise (see |lua-buffer|).
+
+	vim.buffer([arg])	If "arg" is a number, returns buffer with
+				number "arg" in the buffer list or, if "arg"
+				is a string, returns buffer whose full or short
+				name is "arg". In both cases, returns 'nil'
+				(nil value, not string) if the buffer is not
+				found. Otherwise, if "toboolean(arg)" is
+				'true' returns the first buffer in the buffer
+				list or else the current buffer.
+
+	vim.iswindow(value)	Returns 'true' (boolean, not string) if
+				"value" is a window userdata and
+				'false' otherwise (see |lua-window|).
+
+	vim.window([arg])	If "arg" is a number, returns window with
+				number "arg" or 'nil' (nil value, not string)
+				if not found. Otherwise, if "toboolean(arg)"
+				is 'true' returns the first window or else the
+				current window.
+
+	vim.command({cmd})	Executes the vim (ex-mode) command {cmd}.
+				Examples: >
+					:lua vim.command"set tw=60"
+					:lua vim.command"normal ddp"
+<
+	vim.eval({expr})	Evaluates expression {expr} (see |expression|),
+				converts the result to Lua, and returns it.
+				Vim strings and numbers are directly converted
+				to Lua strings and numbers respectively. Vim
+				lists and dictionaries are converted to Lua
+				tables (lists become integer-keyed tables).
+				Examples: >
+					:lua tw = vim.eval"&tw"
+					:lua print(vim.eval"{'a': 'one'}".a)
+<
+	vim.line()		Returns the current line (without the trailing
+				<EOL>), a Lua string.
+
+	vim.beep()		Beeps.
+
+	vim.open({fname})	Opens a new buffer for file {fname} and
+				returns it. Note that the buffer is not set as
+				current.
+
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*
+
+Buffer userdata represent vim buffers. A buffer userdata "b" has the following
+properties and methods:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "b()" sets "b" as the current buffer.
+	o "#b" is the number of lines in buffer "b".
+	o "b[k]" represents line number k: "b[k] = newline" replaces line k
+	    with string "newline" and "b[k] = nil" deletes line k.
+	o "b.name" contains the short name of buffer "b" (read-only).
+	o "b.fname" contains the full name of buffer "b" (read-only).
+	o "b.number" contains the position of buffer "b" in the buffer list
+	    (read-only).
+
+Methods
+-------
+	o "b:insert(newline[, pos])" inserts string "newline" at (optional)
+	    position "pos" in the buffer. The default value for "pos" is
+	    "#b + 1". If "pos == 0" then "newline" becomes the first line in
+	    the buffer.
+	o "b:next()" returns the buffer next to "b" in the buffer list.
+	o "b:previous()" returns the buffer previous to "b" in the buffer
+	    list.
+	o "b:isvalid()" returns 'true' (boolean) if buffer "b" corresponds to
+	    a "real" (not freed from memory) Vim buffer.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:lua b = vim.buffer() -- current buffer
+	:lua print(b.name, b.number)
+	:lua b[1] = "first line"
+	:lua b:insert("FIRST!", 0)
+	:lua b[1] = nil -- delete top line
+	:lua for i=1,3 do b:insert(math.random()) end
+	:3,4lua for i=vim.lastline,vim.firstline,-1 do b[i] = nil end
+	:lua vim.open"myfile"() -- open buffer and set it as current
+
+	function! ListBuffers()
+	lua << EOF
+	local b = vim.buffer(true) -- first buffer in list
+	while b ~= nil do
+		print(b.number, b.name, #b)
+		b = b:next()
+	end
+	vim.beep()
+	EOF
+	endfunction
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Window userdata					*lua-window*
+
+Window objects represent vim windows. A window userdata "w" has the following
+properties and methods:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "w()" sets "w" as the current window.
+	o "w.buffer" contains the buffer of window "w" (read-only).
+	o "w.line" represents the cursor line position in window "w".
+	o "w.col" represents the cursor column position in window "w".
+	o "w.width" represents the width of window "w".
+	o "w.height" represents the height of window "w".
+
+Methods
+-------
+	o "w:next()" returns the window next to "w".
+	o "w:previous()" returns the window previous to "w".
+	o "w:isvalid()" returns 'true' (boolean) if window "w" corresponds to
+	    a "real" (not freed from memory) Vim window.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:lua w = vim.window() -- current window
+	:lua print(w.buffer.name, w.line, w.col)
+	:lua w.width = w.width + math.random(10)
+	:lua w.height = 2 * math.random() * w.height
+	:lua n,w = 0,vim.window(true) while w~=nil do n,w = n + 1,w:next() end
+	:lua print("There are " .. n .. " windows")
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2010 Jan 19
+*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Feb 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sergey Khorev
@@ -185,8 +185,7 @@ Buffers							 *mzscheme-buffer*
 				    current buffer will be used.
     (get-buff-line-list {start} {end} [buffer])
 				    Get a list of lines in a buffer. {Start}
-				    and {end} are 1-based. {Start} is
-				    inclusive, {end} - exclusive.
+				    and {end} are 1-based and inclusive.
     (set-buff-line-list {start} {end} {string-list} [buffer])
 				    Set a list of lines in a buffer. If
 				    string-list is #f or null, the lines get
@@ -200,8 +199,8 @@ Buffers							 *mzscheme-buffer*
 				    Insert a list of lines into a buffer after
 				    {linenr}. If {linenr} is 0, lines will be
 				    inserted at start.
-    (curr-buff)			    Get the current buffer. Use procedures
-				    from "vimcmd" module to change it.
+    (curr-buff)			    Get the current buffer. Use other MzScheme
+				    interface procedures to change it.
     (buff-count)		    Get count of total buffers in the editor.
     (get-next-buff [buffer])	    Get next buffer.
     (get-prev-buff [buffer])	    Get previous buffer. Return #f when there
@@ -234,7 +233,7 @@ Windows							    *mzscheme-window*
 ==============================================================================
 5. mzeval() Vim function				    *mzscheme-mzeval*
 
-To facilitate bi-directional interface, you can use |mzeval| function to
+To facilitate bi-directional interface, you can use |mzeval()| function to
 evaluate MzScheme expressions and pass their values to VimL.
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/if_ole.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ole.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
+*if_ole.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore

runtime/doc/if_perl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2006 Mar 06
+*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sven Verdoolaege
@@ -265,18 +265,26 @@ Note that "EOF" must be at the start of the line.
 ==============================================================================
 4. Dynamic loading					*perl-dynamic*
 
-On MS-Windows the Perl library can be loaded dynamically.  The |:version|
-output then includes |+perl/dyn|.
+On MS-Windows and Unix the Perl library can be loaded dynamically.  The
+|:version| output then includes |+perl/dyn|.
 
-This means that Vim will search for the Perl DLL file only when needed.  When
-you don't use the Perl interface you don't need it, thus you can use Vim
-without this DLL file.
+This means that Vim will search for the Perl DLL or shared library file only
+when needed.  When you don't use the Perl interface you don't need it, thus
+you can use Vim without this file.
 
-To use the Perl interface the Perl DLL must be in your search path.  In a
-console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+
+MS-Windows ~
+
+You can download Perl from http://www.perl.org.  The one from ActiveState was
+used for building Vim.
+
+To use the Perl interface the Perl DLL must be in your search path.
+If Vim reports it cannot find the perl512.dll, make sure your $PATH includes
+the directory where it is located.  The Perl installer normally does that.
+In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Perl version Vim was compiled with.
-Currently the name is "perl58.dll".  That is for Perl 5.8.  To know for
+Currently the name is "perl512.dll".  That is for Perl 5.12.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "perl\d*.dll\c".
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Oct 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -12,11 +12,14 @@ The Python Interface to Vim				*python* *Python*
 4. Range objects		|python-range|
 5. Window objects		|python-window|
 6. Dynamic loading		|python-dynamic|
+7. Python 3			|python3|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
-The Python interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the
+The Python 2.x interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the
 |+python| feature.
+The Python 3 interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the
+|+python3| feature.
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Commands						*python-commands*
@@ -237,10 +240,12 @@ with marks (see below) which use vim line numbers.
 
 The buffer object methods are:
 	b.append(str)	Append a line to the buffer
+	b.append(str, nr)  Idem, below line "nr"
 	b.append(list)	Append a list of lines to the buffer
 			Note that the option of supplying a list of strings to
 			the append method differs from the equivalent method
 			for Python's built-in list objects.
+	b.append(list, nr)  Idem, below line "nr"
 	b.mark(name)	Return a tuple (row,col) representing the position
 			of the named mark (can also get the []"<> marks)
 	b.range(s,e)	Return a range object (see |python-range|) which
@@ -282,10 +287,12 @@ The range object attributes are:
 
 The range object methods are:
 	r.append(str)	Append a line to the range
+	r.append(str, nr)  Idem, after line "nr"
 	r.append(list)	Append a list of lines to the range
 			Note that the option of supplying a list of strings to
 			the append method differs from the equivalent method
 			for Python's built-in list objects.
+	r.append(list, nr)  Idem, after line "nr"
 
 Example (assume r is the current range):
 	# Send all lines in a range to the default printer
@@ -327,5 +334,49 @@ The name of the DLL must match the Python version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "python24.dll".  That is for Python 2.4.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "python\d*.dll\c".
 
+==============================================================================
+7. Python 3						*python3*
+
+							*:py3* *:python3*
+The |:py3| and |:python3| commands work similar to |:python|.
+							*:py3file*
+The |:py3file| command works similar to |:pyfile|.
+
+Vim can be built in four ways (:version output):
+1. No Python support	    (-python, -python3)
+2. Python 2 support only    (+python or +python/dyn, -python3)
+3. Python 3 support only    (-python, +python3 or +python3/dyn)
+4. Python 2 and 3 support   (+python/dyn, +python3/dyn)
+
+Some more details on the special case 4:
+
+When Python 2 and Python 3 are both supported they must be loaded dynamically.
+
+When doing this on Linux/Unix systems and importing global symbols, this leads
+to a crash when the second Python version is used.  So either global symbols
+are loaded but only one Python version is activated, or no global symbols are
+loaded. The latter makes Python's "import" fail on libraries that expect the
+symbols to be provided by Vim.
+							*E836* *E837*
+Vim's configuration script makes a guess for all libraries based on one
+standard Python library (termios).  If importing this library succeeds for
+both Python versions, then both will be made available in Vim at the same
+time.  If not, only the version first used in a session will be enabled.
+When trying to use the other one you will get the E836 or E837 error message.
+
+Here Vim's behavior depends on the system in which it was configured.  In a
+system where both versions of Python were configured with --enable-shared,
+both versions of Python will be activated at the same time.  There will still
+be problems with other third party libraries that were not linked to
+libPython.
+
+To work around such problems there are these options:
+1. The problematic library is recompiled to link to the according
+   libpython.so.
+2. Vim is recompiled for only one Python version.
+3. You undefine PY_NO_RTLD_GLOBAL in auto/config.h after configuration.  This
+   may crash Vim though.
+
+
 ==============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
+*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Shugo Maeda
@@ -194,12 +194,20 @@ This means that Vim will search for the Ruby DLL file only when needed.  When
 you don't use the Ruby interface you don't need it, thus you can use Vim
 without this DLL file.
 
+You need to install the right version of Ruby for this to work.  You can find
+the package to download from:
+http://www.garbagecollect.jp/ruby/mswin32/en/download/release.html
+Currently that is ruby-1.9.1-p429-i386-mswin32.zip
+
 To use the Ruby interface the Ruby DLL must be in your search path.  In a
 console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Ruby version Vim was compiled with.
-Currently the name is "ruby18.dll".  That is for Ruby 1.8.  To know for sure
-edit "gvim.exe" and search for "ruby\d*.dll\c".
+Currently the name is "msvcrt-ruby191.dll".  That is for Ruby 1.9.1.  To know
+for sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "ruby\d*.dll\c".
+
+If you want to build Vim with Ruby 1.9.1, you need to edit the config.h file
+and comment-out the check for _MSC_VER.
 
 ==============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_sniff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_sniff.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*if_sniff.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL

runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
+*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ingo Wilken

runtime/doc/indent.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Nov 12
+*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -215,6 +215,19 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 			  a = b;	    a = b;	      a = b;
 		      }			}		  }
 		  }		      }			  }
+<
+	LN    Controls placement of jump labels. If N is negative, the label
+	      will be placed at column 1. If N is non-negative, the indent of
+	      the label will be the prevailing indent minus N.  (default -1).
+
+		cino=               cino=L2             cino=Ls >
+		  func()              func()              func()
+		  {                   {                   {
+		      {                   {                   {
+		          stmt;               stmt;               stmt;
+		  LABEL:                    LABEL:            LABEL:
+		      }                   }                   }
+		  }                   }                   }
 <
 	:N    Place case labels N characters from the indent of the switch().
 	      (default 'shiftwidth').
@@ -430,6 +443,24 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 			do_something();
 		    }
 		});
+<
+				*javascript-cinoptions* *javascript-indenting*
+	JN    Indent JavaScript object declarations correctly by not confusing
+	      them with labels.  The value 'N' is currently unused but must be 
+	      non-zero (e.g. 'J1'). >
+
+		var bar = {
+		    foo: {
+			that: this,
+			some: ok,
+		    },
+		    "bar":{ 
+			a : 2,
+			b: "123abc",
+			x: 4,
+			"y": 5
+		    }
+		}
 <
 	)N    Vim searches for unclosed parentheses at most N lines away.
 	      This limits the time needed to search for parentheses.  (default
@@ -437,7 +468,7 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 
 	*N    Vim searches for unclosed comments at most N lines away.  This
 	      limits the time needed to search for the start of a comment.
-	      (default 30 lines).
+	      (default 70 lines).
 
 	#N    When N is non-zero recognize shell/Perl comments, starting with
 	      '#'.  Default N is zero: don't recognizes '#' comments.  Note
@@ -446,13 +477,14 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 
 
 The defaults, spelled out in full, are:
-	cinoptions=>s,e0,n0,f0,{0,}0,^0,:s,=s,l0,b0,gs,hs,ps,ts,is,+s,c3,C0,
-		   /0,(2s,us,U0,w0,W0,m0,j0,)20,*30,#0
+	cinoptions=>s,e0,n0,f0,{0,}0,^0,L-1,:s,=s,l0,b0,gs,hs,ps,ts,is,+s,
+			c3,C0,/0,(2s,us,U0,w0,W0,m0,j0,J0,)20,*70,#0
 
 Vim puts a line in column 1 if:
 - It starts with '#' (preprocessor directives), if 'cinkeys' contains '#'.
 - It starts with a label (a keyword followed by ':', other than "case" and
-  "default").
+  "default") and 'cinoptions' does not contain an 'L' entry with a positive
+  value.
 - Any combination of indentations causes the line to have less than 0
   indentation.
 
@@ -552,6 +584,10 @@ For example, with N = 1, this will give:
 (Notice the extra indent between the PHP container markers and the code)
 -------------
 
+To indent PHP tags as the surrounding code: >
+    :let g:PHP_outdentphpescape = 0
+-------------
+
 To automatically remove '\r' characters when the 'fileformat' is set to Unix: >
     :let g:PHP_removeCRwhenUnix = 1
 -------------
@@ -577,7 +613,7 @@ NOTE:	Indenting will be a bit slower if this option is used because some
 To indent 'case:' and 'default:' statements in switch() blocks: >
     :let g:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent = 1
 
-(By default they are indented at the same level than the 'switch()' to avoid
+(Since in PHP braces are not required inside 'case/default' blocks, by default they are indented at the same level than the 'switch()' to avoid
 unnecessary indentation)
 
 

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Jul 01
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ tag		char		action	~
 |i_CTRL-^|	CTRL-^		toggle use of |:lmap| mappings
 |i_CTRL-_|	CTRL-_		When 'allowrevins' set: change language
 				(Hebrew, Farsi) {only when compiled with
-				+rightleft feature}
+				the |+rightleft| feature}
 
 		<Space> to '~'	not used, except '0' and '^' followed by
 				CTRL-D
@@ -136,10 +136,14 @@ tag		char		action	~
 |i_<Help>|	<Help>		stop insert mode and display help window
 |i_<Insert>|	<Insert>	toggle Insert/Replace mode
 |i_<LeftMouse>|	<LeftMouse>	cursor at mouse click
-|i_<MouseDown>|	<MouseDown>	scroll three lines downwards
-|i_<S-MouseDown>| <S-MouseDown>	scroll a full page downwards
-|i_<MouseUp>|	<MouseUp>	scroll three lines upwards
-|i_<S-MouseUp>|	<S-MouseUp>	scroll a full page upwards
+|i_<ScrollWheelDown>|	<ScrollWheelDown>	move window three lines down
+|i_<S-ScrollWheelDown>|	<S-ScrollWheelDown>	move window one page down
+|i_<ScrollWheelUp>|	<ScrollWheelUp>		move window three lines up
+|i_<S-ScrollWheelUp>|	<S-ScrollWheelUp>	move window one page up
+|i_<ScrollWheelLeft>|	<ScrollWheelLeft>	move window six columns left
+|i_<S-ScrollWheelLeft>| <S-ScrollWheelLeft>	move window one page left
+|i_<ScrollWheelRight>|	<ScrollWheelRight>	move window six columns right
+|i_<S-ScrollWheelRight>| <S-ScrollWheelRight>	move window one page right
 
 commands in CTRL-X submode				*i_CTRL-X_index*
 
@@ -159,7 +163,7 @@ commands in CTRL-X submode				*i_CTRL-X_index*
 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-V|	CTRL-X CTRL-V	complete like in : command line
 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]|	CTRL-X CTRL-]	complete tags
 |i_CTRL-X_s|		CTRL-X s	spelling suggestions
-{not available when compiled without the +insert_expand feature}
+{not available when compiled without the |+insert_expand| feature}
 
 ==============================================================================
 2. Normal mode						*normal-index*
@@ -441,10 +445,14 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |<S-Up>|	<S-Up>		1  same as CTRL-B
 |<Undo>|	<Undo>		2  same as "u"
 |<Up>|		<Up>		1  same as "k"
-|<MouseDown>|	<MouseDown>	   scroll three lines downwards
-|<S-MouseDown>|	<S-MouseDown>	   scroll a full page downwards
-|<MouseUp>|	<MouseUp>	   scroll three lines upwards
-|<S-MouseUp>|	<S-MouseUp>	   scroll a full page upwards
+|<ScrollWheelDown>|	<ScrollWheelDown>	move window three lines down
+|<S-ScrollWheelDown>|	<S-ScrollWheelDown>	move window one page down
+|<ScrollWheelUp>|	<ScrollWheelUp>		move window three lines up
+|<S-ScrollWheelUp>|	<S-ScrollWheelUp>	move window one page up
+|<ScrollWheelLeft>|	<ScrollWheelLeft>	move window six columns left
+|<S-ScrollWheelLeft>|	<S-ScrollWheelLeft>	move window one page left
+|<ScrollWheelRight>|	<ScrollWheelRight>	move window six columns right
+|<S-ScrollWheelRight>|	<S-ScrollWheelRight>	move window one page right
 
 ==============================================================================
 2.1 Text objects						*objects*
@@ -1299,6 +1307,9 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:ltag|		:lt[ag]		jump to tag and add matching tags to the
 				location list
 |:lunmap|	:lu[nmap]	like ":unmap!" but includes Lang-Arg mode
+|:lua|		:lua		execute |Lua| command
+|:luado|	:luad[o]	execute Lua command for each line
+|:luafile|	:luaf[ile]	execute |Lua| script file
 |:lvimgrep|	:lv[imgrep]	search for pattern in files
 |:lvimgrepadd|	:lvimgrepa[dd]	like :vimgrep, but append to current list
 |:lwindow|	:lw[indow]	open or close location window
@@ -1321,7 +1332,9 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:mode|		:mod[e]		show or change the screen mode
 |:mzscheme|	:mz[scheme]	execute MzScheme command
 |:mzfile|	:mzf[ile]	execute MzScheme script file
+|:nbclose|	:nbc[lose]	close the current Netbeans session
 |:nbkey|	:nb[key]	pass a key to Netbeans
+|:nbstart|	:nbs[art]	start a new Netbeans session
 |:next|		:n[ext]		go to next file in the argument list
 |:new|		:new		create a new empty window
 |:nmap|		:nm[ap]		like ":map" but for Normal mode
@@ -1350,6 +1363,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:options|	:opt[ions]	open the options-window
 |:ounmap|	:ou[nmap]	like ":unmap" but for Operator-pending mode
 |:ounmenu|	:ounme[nu]	remove menu for Operator-pending mode
+|:ownsyntax|	:ow[nsyntax]	set new local syntax highlight for this window
 |:pclose|	:pc[lose]	close preview window
 |:pedit|	:ped[it]	edit file in the preview window
 |:perl|		:pe[rl]		execute Perl command
@@ -1376,6 +1390,9 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:ptselect|	:pts[elect]	|:tselect| and show tag in preview window
 |:put|		:pu[t]		insert contents of register in the text
 |:pwd|		:pw[d]		print current directory
+|:py3|		:py3		execute Python 3 command
+|:python3|	:python3	same as :py3
+|:py3file|	:py3f[ile]	execute Python 3 script file
 |:python|	:py[thon]	execute Python command
 |:pyfile|	:pyf[ile]	execute Python script file
 |:quit|		:q[uit]		quit current window (when one window quit Vim)
@@ -1397,6 +1414,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:ruby|		:rub[y]		execute Ruby command
 |:rubydo|	:rubyd[o]	execute Ruby command for each line
 |:rubyfile|	:rubyf[ile]	execute Ruby script file
+|:rundo|	:rund[o]	read undo information from a file
 |:runtime|	:ru[ntime]	source vim scripts in 'runtimepath'
 |:rviminfo|	:rv[iminfo]	read from viminfo file
 |:substitute|	:s[ubstitute]	find and replace text
@@ -1562,6 +1580,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:wq|		:wq		write to a file and quit window or Vim
 |:wqall|	:wqa[ll]	write all changed buffers and quit Vim
 |:wsverb|	:ws[verb]	pass the verb to workshop over IPC
+|:wundo|	:wu[ndo]	write undo information to a file
 |:wviminfo|	:wv[iminfo]	write to viminfo file
 |:xit|		:x[it]		write if buffer changed and quit window or Vim
 |:xall|		:xa[ll]		same as ":wqall"

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Jul 14
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -359,10 +359,14 @@ CTRL-G CTRL-J	cursor one line down, insert start column    *i_CTRL-G_CTRL-J*
 <PageUp>	move window one page up			     *i_<PageUp>*
 <S-Down>	move window one page down		     *i_<S-Down>*
 <PageDown>	move window one page down		     *i_<PageDown>*
-<MouseDown>	scroll three lines down			     *i_<MouseDown>*
-<S-MouseDown>	scroll a full page down			     *i_<S-MouseDown>*
-<MouseUp>	scroll three lines up			     *i_<MouseUp>*
-<S-MouseUp>	scroll a full page up			     *i_<S-MouseUp>*
+<ScrollWheelDown>    move window three lines down	*i_<ScrollWheelDown>*
+<S-ScrollWheelDown>  move window one page down		*i_<S-ScrollWheelDown>*
+<ScrollWheelUp>      move window three lines up		*i_<ScrollWheelUp>*
+<S-ScrollWheelUp>    move window one page up		*i_<S-ScrollWheelUp>*
+<ScrollWheelLeft>    move window six columns left	*i_<ScrollWheelLeft>*
+<S-ScrollWheelLeft>  move window one page left		*i_<S-ScrollWheelLeft>*
+<ScrollWheelRight>   move window six columns right	*i_<ScrollWheelRight>*
+<S-ScrollWheelRight> move window one page right		*i_<S-ScrollWheelRight>*
 CTRL-O		execute one command, return to Insert mode   *i_CTRL-O*
 CTRL-\ CTRL-O	like CTRL-O but don't move the cursor	     *i_CTRL-\_CTRL-O*
 CTRL-L		when 'insertmode' is set: go to Normal mode  *i_CTRL-L*
@@ -523,7 +527,7 @@ last one).  {Vi does not have the 'expandtab' option}
 6. Virtual Replace mode		*vreplace-mode* *Virtual-Replace-mode*
 
 Enter Virtual Replace mode with the "gR" command in normal mode.
-{not available when compiled without the +vreplace feature}
+{not available when compiled without the |+vreplace| feature}
 {Vi does not have Virtual Replace mode}
 
 Virtual Replace mode is similar to Replace mode, but instead of replacing
@@ -551,12 +555,11 @@ CTRL-D, 'expandtab', 'smarttab', 'softtabstop', etc.
 In 'list' mode, Virtual Replace mode acts as if it was not in 'list' mode,
 unless "L" is in 'cpoptions'.
 
-Note that the only times characters beyond the cursor should appear to move
-are in 'list' mode, and occasionally when 'wrap' is set (and the line changes
-length to become shorter or wider than the width of the screen), or
-momentarily when typing over a CTRL character.  A CTRL character takes up two
-screen spaces.  When replacing it with two normal characters, the first will
-be inserted and the second will replace the CTRL character.
+Note that the only situations for which characters beyond the cursor should
+appear to move are in List mode |'list'|, and occasionally when 'wrap' is set
+(and the line changes length to become shorter or wider than the width of the
+screen).  In other cases spaces may be inserted to avoid following characters
+to move.
 
 This mode is very useful for editing <Tab> separated columns in tables, for
 entering new data while keeping all the columns aligned.
@@ -639,6 +642,7 @@ completion operation: >
 	      return "\<Tab>"
 	   else
 	      return "\<C-N>"
+	   endif
 	endfunction
 	inoremap <Tab> <C-R>=CleverTab()<CR>
 
@@ -1357,7 +1361,7 @@ Script completes:
 - function names with additional info:
   - in case of built-in functions list of possible arguments and after | type
     data returned by function
-  - in case of user function arguments and name of file were function was
+  - in case of user function arguments and name of file where function was
     defined (if it is not current file)
 
 - constants names
@@ -1445,8 +1449,8 @@ a look at the PHP filetype to see how this works.
 If you edit a file called, index.php, run the following command: >
 	:syntax list
 
-First thing you will notice is there are many different syntax groups.  The
-PHP language can include elements from different languages like HTML,
+The first thing you will notice is that there are many different syntax groups.
+The PHP language can include elements from different languages like HTML,
 JavaScript and many more.  The syntax plugin will only include syntax groups
 that begin with the filetype, "php", in this case.  For example these syntax
 groups are included by default with the PHP: phpEnvVar, phpIntVar,
@@ -1483,6 +1487,38 @@ on word characters.   This can be controlled adding the following to your
 vimrc: >
     let g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword = 0
 
+For plugin developers, the plugin exposes a public function OmniSyntaxList.
+This function can be used to request a List of syntax items.  When editing a
+SQL file (:e syntax.sql) you can use the ":syntax list" command to see the 
+various groups and syntax items.  For example: >
+    syntax list 
+
+Yields data similar to this: >
+    sqlOperator    xxx some prior all like and any escape exists in is not 
+                       or intersect minus between distinct
+                       links to Operator
+    sqlType        xxx varbit varchar nvarchar bigint int uniqueidentifier 
+                       date money long tinyint unsigned xml text smalldate 
+                       double datetime nchar smallint numeric time bit char 
+                       varbinary binary smallmoney
+                       image float integer timestamp real decimal
+
+There are two syntax groups listed here: sqlOperator and sqlType.  To retrieve
+a List of syntax items you can call OmniSyntaxList a number of different 
+ways.  To retrieve all syntax items regardless of syntax group:  >
+    echo OmniSyntaxList( [] )
+
+To retrieve only the syntax items for the sqlOperator syntax group: >
+    echo OmniSyntaxList( ['sqlOperator'] )
+
+To retrieve all syntax items for both the sqlOperator and sqlType groups: >
+    echo OmniSyntaxList( ['sqlOperator', 'sqlType'] )
+
+From within a plugin, you would typically assign the output to a List: >
+    let myKeywords = []
+    let myKeywords = OmniSyntaxList( ['sqlKeyword'] )
+
+    
 
 SQL							*ft-sql-omni*
 
@@ -1730,6 +1766,11 @@ These two commands will keep on asking for lines, until you type a line
 containing only a ".".  Watch out for lines starting with a backslash, see
 |line-continuation|.
 
+When in Ex mode (see |-e|) a backslash at the end of the line can be used to
+insert a NUL character.  To be able to have a line ending in a backslash use
+two backslashes.  This means that the number of backslashes is halved, but
+only at the end of the line.
+
 NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|.
 ":append" and ":insert" don't work properly in between ":if" and
 ":endif", ":for" and ":endfor", ":while" and ":endwhile".
@@ -1744,7 +1785,7 @@ NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|.
 			or script is finished.
 			This command does not work from |:normal|.
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +ex_extra
+			{not available when compiled without the |+ex_extra|
 			feature}
 
 							*:stopi* *:stopinsert*
@@ -1763,14 +1804,14 @@ NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|.
 			script that the replacement will only start after
 			the function or script is finished.
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +ex_extra
+			{not available when compiled without the |+ex_extra|
 			feature}
 
 							*:startgreplace*
 :startg[replace][!]	Just like |:startreplace|, but use Virtual Replace
 			mode, like with |gR|.
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +ex_extra
+			{not available when compiled without the |+ex_extra|
 			feature}
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Apr 21
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -194,6 +194,7 @@ patches, suggestions and giving feedback about what is good and bad in Vim.
 Vim would never have become what it is now, without the help of these people!
 
 	Ron Aaron		Win32 GUI changes
+	Mohsin Ahmed		encryption
 	Zoltan Arpadffy		work on VMS port
 	Tony Andrews		Stevie
 	Gert van Antwerpen	changes for DJGPP on MS-DOS
@@ -226,13 +227,13 @@ Vim would never have become what it is now, without the help of these people!
 	David Leonard		Port of Python extensions to Unix
 	Avner Lottem		Edit in right-to-left windows
 	Flemming Madsen		X11 client-server, various features and patches
-	Microsoft		Gave me a copy of DevStudio to compile Vim with
+	Tony Mechelynck		answers many user questions
 	Paul Moore		Python interface extensions, many patches
 	Katsuhito Nagano	Work on multi-byte versions
 	Sung-Hyun Nam		Work on multi-byte versions
 	Vince Negri		Win32 GUI and generic console enhancements
 	Steve Oualline		Author of the first Vim book |frombook|
-	Dominique Pelle		figuring out valgrind reports and fixes
+	Dominique Pelle		valgrind reports and many fixes
 	A.Politz		Many bug reports and some fixes
 	George V. Reilly	Win32 port, Win32 GUI start-off
 	Stephen Riehm		bug collector
@@ -299,7 +300,7 @@ and <> are part of what you type, the context should make this clear.
 
 []		Characters in square brackets are optional.
 
-						    *count* *[count]* *E489*
+						    *count* *[count]*
 [count]		An optional number that may precede the command to multiply
 		or iterate the command.  If no number is given, a count of one
 		is used, unless otherwise noted.  Note that in this manual the

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Nov 04
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ otherwise you would not be able to use those commands anymore.  Here are a few
 suggestions:
 - Function keys <F2>, <F3>, etc..  Also the shifted function keys <S-F1>,
   <S-F2>, etc.  Note that <F1> is already used for the help command.
-- Meta-keys (with the ALT key pressed).  Depending on your keybord accented
+- Meta-keys (with the ALT key pressed).  Depending on your keyboard accented
   characters may be used as well. |:map-alt-keys|
 - Use the '_' or ',' character and then any other character.  The "_" and ","
   commands do exist in Vim (see |_| and |,|), but you probably never use them.
@@ -767,10 +767,10 @@ g@{motion}		Call the function set by the 'operatorfunc' option.
 			The function is called with one String argument:
 			    "line"	{motion} was |linewise|
 			    "char"	{motion} was |characterwise|
-			    "block"	{motion} was |blockwise-visual||
+			    "block"	{motion} was |blockwise-visual|
 			Although "block" would rarely appear, since it can
 			only result from Visual mode where "g@" is not useful.
-			{not available when compiled without the +eval
+			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
 			feature}
 
 Here is an example that counts the number of spaces with <F4>: >
@@ -1080,7 +1080,7 @@ to find out what they are defined to.
 The |:scriptnames| command can be used to see which scripts have been sourced
 and what their <SNR> number is.
 
-This is all {not in Vi} and {not available when compiled without the +eval
+This is all {not in Vi} and {not available when compiled without the |+eval|
 feature}.
 
 ==============================================================================
@@ -1203,18 +1203,22 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=augroup	autocmd groups
 	-complete=buffer	buffer names
 	-complete=command	Ex command (and arguments)
+	-complete=cscope	|:cscope| suboptions
 	-complete=dir		directory names
 	-complete=environment	environment variable names
 	-complete=event		autocommand events
 	-complete=expression	Vim expression
 	-complete=file		file and directory names
-	-complete=shellcmd	Shell command
+	-complete=filetype	filetype names |'filetype'|
 	-complete=function	function name
 	-complete=help		help subjects
 	-complete=highlight	highlight groups
 	-complete=mapping	mapping name
 	-complete=menu		menus
 	-complete=option	options
+	-complete=shellcmd	Shell command
+	-complete=sign		|:sign| suboptions
+	-complete=syntax	syntax file names |'syntax'|
 	-complete=tag		tags
 	-complete=tag_listfiles	tags, file names are shown when CTRL-D is hit
 	-complete=var		user variables
@@ -1266,6 +1270,8 @@ the 'path' option: >
     :    return split(globpath(&path, a:A), "\n")
     :endfun
 <
+This example does not work for file names with spaces!
+
 
 Range handling				*E177* *E178* *:command-range*
 							*:command-count*

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Nov 17
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ For an introduction to the most common features, see |usr_45.txt| in the user
 manual.
 For changing the language of messages and menus see |mlang.txt|.
 
-{not available when compiled without the +multi_byte feature}
+{not available when compiled without the |+multi_byte| feature}
 
 
 1.  Getting started			|mbyte-first|
@@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ Then add a command to your |gvimrc| file to set 'guifont': >
 
 X INPUT METHOD (XIM) BACKGROUND			*XIM* *xim* *x-input-method*
 
-XIM is an international input module for X.  There are two kind of structures,
+XIM is an international input module for X.  There are two kinds of structures,
 Xlib unit type and |IM-server| (Input-Method server) type.  |IM-server| type
 is suitable for complex input, such as CJK.
 
@@ -775,7 +775,7 @@ is suitable for complex input, such as CJK.
   For Chinese, there's a great XIM server named "xcin", you can input both
   Traditional and Simplified Chinese characters.  And it can accept other
   locale if you make a correct input table.  Xcin can be found at:
-  http://xcin.linux.org.tw/
+  http://cle.linux.org.tw/xcin/
   Others are scim: http://scim.freedesktop.org/ and fcitx:
   http://www.fcitx.org/
 
@@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ Use the RPM or port for your system.
   of Preedit Area and Status Area: |OnTheSpot|, |OffTheSpot|, |OverTheSpot|
   and |Root|.
 
-  Currently, GUI Vim support three style, |OverTheSpot|, |OffTheSpot| and
+  Currently, GUI Vim supports three styles, |OverTheSpot|, |OffTheSpot| and
   |Root|.
 
 *.  on-the-spot						*OnTheSpot*
@@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ See 'imactivatekey' for the format.
 
 {only works Windows GUI and compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime| feature}
 
-To input multibyte characters on Windows, you have to use Input Method Editor
+To input multibyte characters on Windows, you can use an Input Method Editor
 (IME).  In process of your editing text, you must switch status (on/off) of
 IME many many many times.  Because IME with status on is hooking all of your
 key inputs, you cannot input 'j', 'k', or almost all of keys to Vim directly.
@@ -947,7 +947,7 @@ the different input methods or disable them temporarily.
 WHAT IS IME
     IME is a part of East asian version Windows.  That helps you to input
     multibyte character.  English and other language version Windows does not
-    have any IME.  (Also there are no need usually.) But there is one that
+    have any IME.  (Also there is no need usually.) But there is one that
     called Microsoft Global IME.  Global IME is a part of Internet Explorer
     4.0 or above.  You can get more information about Global IME, at below
     URL.
@@ -963,10 +963,10 @@ WHAT IS GLOBAL IME					*global-ime*
     language version of Global IME at same place.
 
     - Global IME detailed information.
-	http://www.microsoft.com/windows/ie/features/ime.asp
+	http://search.microsoft.com/results.aspx?q=global+ime
 
     - Active Input Method Manager (Global IME)
-	http://msdn.microsoft.com/workshop/misc/AIMM/aimm.asp
+	http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa741221(v=VS.85).aspx
 
     Support for Global IME is an experimental feature.
 
@@ -1267,8 +1267,8 @@ is no longer relevant in the GTK+ 2 GUI.
 When reading a file a BOM (Byte Order Mark) can be used to recognize the
 Unicode encoding:
 	EF BB BF     utf-8
-	FF FE        utf-16 big endian
-	FE FF        utf-16 little endian
+	FE FF        utf-16 big endian
+	FF FE        utf-16 little endian
 	00 00 FE FF  utf-32 big endian
 	FF FE 00 00  utf-32 little endian
 

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Oct 28
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ The ":messages" command can be used to view previously given messages.  This
 is especially useful when messages have been overwritten or truncated.  This
 depends on the 'shortmess' option.
 
-The number of remembered messages is fixed at 20 for the tiny version and 100
+The number of remembered messages is fixed at 20 for the tiny version and 200
 for other versions.
 
 								*g<*
@@ -65,14 +65,14 @@ or view a list of recent messages with: >
 LIST OF MESSAGES
 			*E222* *E228* *E232* *E256* *E293* *E298* *E304* *E317*
 			*E318* *E356* *E438* *E439* *E440* *E316* *E320* *E322*
-			*E323* *E341* *E473* *E570* *E685* >
+			*E323* *E341* *E473* *E570* *E685*  >
   Add to read buffer
   makemap: Illegal mode
   Cannot create BalloonEval with both message and callback
   Hangul automata ERROR
   block was not locked
   Didn't get block nr {N}?
-  ml_timestamp: Didn't get block 0??
+  ml_upd_block0(): Didn't get block 0??
   pointer block id wrong {N}
   Updated too many blocks?
   get_varp ERROR
@@ -128,7 +128,6 @@ The color name {name} is unknown.  See |gui-colors| for a list of colors that
 are available on most systems.
 
 							*E458*  >
-  Cannot allocate colormap entry for "xxxx"
   Cannot allocate colormap entry, some colors may be incorrect
 
 This means that there are not enough colors available for Vim.  It will still
@@ -180,7 +179,7 @@ manually delete the link or the file, or change the permissions so that Vim
 can overwrite.
 
 							*E46*  >
-  Cannot set read-only variable "{name}"
+  Cannot change read-only variable "{name}"
 
 You are trying to assign a value to an argument of a function |a:var| or a Vim
 internal variable |v:var| which is read-only.
@@ -279,8 +278,8 @@ Writing a file was not completed successfully.  The file is probably
 incomplete.
 
 							*E13* *E189*  >
-  File exists (use ! to override)
-  "{filename}" exists (use ! to override)
+  File exists (add ! to override)
+  "{filename}" exists (add ! to override)
 
 You are protected from accidentally overwriting a file.  When you want to
 write anyway, use the same command, but add a "!" just after the command.
@@ -349,7 +348,7 @@ the other way around.  It should be used like this: {foo,bar}.  This matches
 "foo" and "bar".
 
 							*E315*  >
-  ml_get: invalid lnum:
+  ml_get: invalid lnum: {number}
 
 This is an internal Vim error.  Please try to find out how it can be
 reproduced, and submit a bug report |bugreport.vim|.
@@ -420,8 +419,8 @@ mapping.  All variations of this command give the same message: ":cunmap",
   |:map-<buffer>|
 
 							*E37* *E89*  >
-  No write since last change (use ! to override)
-  No write since last change for buffer {N} (use ! to override)
+  No write since last change (add ! to override)
+  No write since last change for buffer {N} (add ! to override)
 
 You are trying to |abandon| a file that has changes.  Vim protects you from
 losing your work.  You can either write the changed file with ":w", or, if you
@@ -468,7 +467,16 @@ Oh, oh.  You must have been doing something complicated, or some other program
 is consuming your memory.  Be careful!  Vim is not completely prepared for an
 out-of-memory situation.  First make sure that any changes are saved.  Then
 try to solve the memory shortage.  To stay on the safe side, exit Vim and
-start again.  Also see |msdos-limitations|.
+start again.
+
+Buffers are only partly kept in memory, thus editing a very large file is
+unlikely to cause an out-of-memory situation.  Undo information is completely
+in memory, you can reduce that with these options:
+- 'undolevels'  Set to a low value, or to -1 to disable undo completely.  This
+  helps for a change that affects all lines.
+- 'undoreload' Set to zero to disable.
+
+Also see |msdos-limitations|.
 
 							*E339*  >
   Pattern too long
@@ -477,7 +485,7 @@ This only happens on systems with 16 bit ints: The compiled regexp pattern is
 longer than about 65000 characters.  Try using a shorter pattern.
 
 							*E45*  >
-  'readonly' option is set (use ! to override)
+  'readonly' option is set (add ! to override)
 
 You are trying to write a file that was marked as read-only.  To write the
 file anyway, either reset the 'readonly' option, or add a '!' character just
@@ -539,7 +547,7 @@ Vim (and Vi) expect tags files to be sorted in ASCII order.  Binary searching
 can then be used, which is a lot faster than a linear search.  If your tags
 files are not properly sorted, reset the |'tagbsearch'| option.
 This message is only given when Vim detects a problem when searching for a
-tag.  Sometimes this message is not given, even thought the tags file is not
+tag.  Sometimes this message is not given, even though the tags file is not
 properly sorted.
 
 							*E460*  >
@@ -586,6 +594,7 @@ when using ":w"), therefore Vim requires using a !  after the command, e.g.:
 Messages like this appear when starting up.  This is not a Vim problem, your
 X11 configuration is wrong.  You can find a hint on how to solve this here:
 http://groups.yahoo.com/group/solarisonintel/message/12179.
+[this URL is no longer valid]
 
 							*W10*  >
   Warning: Changing a readonly file
@@ -641,7 +650,7 @@ bit to be reset.  It should be safe to reload the file.  Set 'autoread' to
 automatically reload the file.
 
 							*E211*  >
-  Warning: File "{filename}" no longer available
+  File "{filename}" no longer available
 
 The file which you have started editing has disappeared, or is no longer
 accessible.  Make sure you write the buffer somewhere to avoid losing
@@ -688,6 +697,7 @@ no argument has been specified.
 
 							*E474* *E475*  >
   Invalid argument
+  Invalid argument: {arg}
 
 An Ex command has been executed, but an invalid argument has been specified.
 
@@ -715,8 +725,8 @@ A range was specified for an Ex command that doesn't permit one.  See
 Vim cannot create a temporary file.
 
 							*E484* *E485*  >
-  Can't open file %s"
-  Can't read file %s"
+  Can't open file {filename}
+  Can't read file {filename}
 
 Vim cannot read a temporary file.
 

runtime/doc/mlang.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Jun 08
+*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -58,8 +58,10 @@ use of "-" and "_".
 			The locale {name} must be a valid locale on your
 			system.  Some systems accept aliases like "en" or
 			"en_US", but some only accept the full specification
-			like "en_US.ISO_8859-1".
-			With the "messages" argument the language used for
+			like "en_US.ISO_8859-1".  On Unix systems you can use
+			the this command to see what locales are supported: >
+				:!locale -a
+<			With the "messages" argument the language used for
 			messages is set.  This can be different when you want,
 			for example, English messages while editing Japanese
 			text.  This sets $LC_MESSAGES.

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Sep 15
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 May 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -315,6 +315,7 @@ _  <underscore>		[count] - 1 lines downward, on the first non-blank
 G			Goto line [count], default last line, on the first
 			non-blank character |linewise|.  If 'startofline' not
 			set, keep the same column.
+			G is a one of |jump-motions|.
 
 							*<C-End>*
 <C-End>			Goto line [count], default last line, on the last
@@ -328,6 +329,8 @@ gg			Goto line [count], default first line, on the first
 :[range]		Set the cursor on the last line number in [range].
 			[range] can also be just one line number, e.g., ":1"
 			or ":'m".
+			In contrast with |G| this command does not modify the
+			|jumplist|.
 							*N%*
 {count}%		Go to {count} percentage in the file, on the first
 			non-blank in the line |linewise|.  To compute the new
@@ -1007,7 +1010,7 @@ unless the line containing that position was changed or deleted.
 							*CTRL-O*
 CTRL-O			Go to [count] Older cursor position in jump list
 			(not a motion command).  {not in Vi}
-			{not available without the +jumplist feature}
+			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 <Tab>		or					*CTRL-I* *<Tab>*
 CTRL-I			Go to [count] newer cursor position in jump list
@@ -1015,18 +1018,18 @@ CTRL-I			Go to [count] newer cursor position in jump list
 			In a |quickfix-window| it takes you to the position of
 			the error under the cursor.
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available without the +jumplist feature}
+			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*:ju* *:jumps*
 :ju[mps]		Print the jump list (not a motion command).  {not in
-			Vi} {not available without the +jumplist feature}
+			Vi} {not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*jumplist*
 Jumps are remembered in a jump list.  With the CTRL-O and CTRL-I command you
 can go to cursor positions before older jumps, and back again.  Thus you can
 move up and down the list.  There is a separate jump list for each window.
 The maximum number of entries is fixed at 100.
-{not available without the +jumplist feature}
+{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 For example, after three jump commands you have this jump list:
 
@@ -1103,14 +1106,14 @@ g;			Go to [count] older position in change list.
 			If there is no older change an error message is given.
 			(not a motion command)
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available without the +jumplist feature}
+			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 							*g,* *E663*
 g,			Go to [count] newer cursor position in change list.
 			Just like |g;| but in the opposite direction.
 			(not a motion command)
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available without the +jumplist feature}
+			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}
 
 When using a count you jump as far back or forward as possible.  Thus you can
 use "999g;" to go to the first change for which the position is still

runtime/doc/netbeans.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Jan 06
+*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur et al.
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Vim NetBeans Protocol: a socket interface for Vim integration into an IDE.
 4.  Error Messages				|netbeans-messages|
 5.  Running Vim in NetBeans mode		|netbeans-run|
 6.  NetBeans protocol				|netbeans-protocol|
-7.  NetBeans key				|netbeans-key|
+7.  NetBeans commands				|netbeans-commands|
 8.  Known problems				|netbeans-problems|
 9.  Debugging NetBeans protocol			|netbeans-debugging|
 10. NetBeans External Editor
@@ -48,6 +48,8 @@ Current projects using the NetBeans protocol of Vim are:
 	http://www.a-a-p.org
 - Clewn, a gdb integration into Vim, written in C:
 	http://clewn.sourceforge.net/
+- Pyclewn, a gdb integration into Vim, written in Python:
+	http://pyclewn.sourceforge.net/
 - VimPlugin, integration of Vim inside Eclipse:
 	http://vimplugin.sourceforge.net/wiki/pmwiki.php
 - PIDA, IDE written in Python integrating Vim:
@@ -101,7 +103,8 @@ use the |clientserver| interface.
 ==============================================================================
 3. Configuring Vim for NetBeans			*netbeans-configure*
 
-For more help installing Vim, please read |usr_90.txt| in the Vim User Manual.
+For more help about installing Vim, please read |usr_90.txt| in the Vim User
+Manual.
 
 
 On Unix:
@@ -114,9 +117,9 @@ the required features succeeds.
 In case you do not want the NetBeans interface you can disable it by
 uncommenting a line with "--disable-netbeans" in the Makefile.
 
-Currently, only GVim is supported in this integration as NetBeans does not
-have means to supply a terminal emulator for the Vim command.  Furthermore,
-there is only GUI support for GTK, GNOME, and Motif.
+Currently the NetBeans interface is supported by Vim running in a terminal and
+by GVim when it is run with one of the following GUIs: GTK, GNOME, Windows,
+Athena and Motif.
 
 If Motif support is required the user must supply XPM libraries.  See
 |workshop-xpm| for details on obtaining the latest version of XPM.
@@ -150,6 +153,12 @@ Region is guarded, cannot modify
 		which you cannot change.  Also sets the current buffer, if
 		necessary.
 
+							*E532*
+The defineAnnoType highlighting color name is too long
+		The maximum length of the "fg" or "bg" color argument in the
+		defineAnnoType command is 32 characters.
+		New in version 2.5.
+
 							*E656*
 Writes of unmodified buffers forbidden
 		Writes of unmodified buffers that were opened from the
@@ -180,25 +189,37 @@ Read-only file
 ==============================================================================
 5. Running Vim in NetBeans mode				*netbeans-run*
 
-Vim must be started with the |-nb| argument.  Three forms can be used, that
-differ in the way the information for the connection is specified:
+There are two different ways to run Vim in NetBeans mode:
+
+	+ an IDE may start Vim with the |-nb| command line argument
+	+ NetBeans can be started from within Vim with the |:nbstart| command
+
+							*netbeans-parameters*
+Three forms can be used to setup the NetBeans connection parameters.
+When started from the command line, the |-nb| command line argument may be:
 
 	-nb={fname}				from a file
 	-nb:{hostname}:{addr}:{password}	directly
 	-nb					from a file or environment
 
+When started from within Vim, the |:nbstart| optional argument may be:
+
+	={fname}				from a file
+	:{hostname}:{addr}:{password}	        directly
+	<MISSING ARGUMENT>			from a file or environment
+
 							*E660* *E668*
-For security reasons, the best method is to write the information in a file
-readable only by the user.  The name of the file can be passed with the
-"-nb={fname}" argument or, when "-nb" is used without a parameter, the
-environment variable "__NETBEANS_CONINFO".  The file must contain these three
-lines, in any order:
+When NetBeans is started from the command line, for security reasons, the best
+method is to write the information in a file readable only by the user.  The
+name of the file can be passed with the "-nb={fname}" argument or, when "-nb"
+is used without a parameter, the environment variable "__NETBEANS_CONINFO".
+The file must contain these three lines, in any order:
 
 	host={hostname}
 	port={addr}
 	auth={password}
 
-Other lines are ignored.  The caller of Vim is responsible for deleting the
+Other lines are ignored.  The Vim Controller is responsible for deleting the
 file afterwards.
 
 {hostname} is the name of the machine where Vim Controller is running.  When
@@ -235,8 +256,8 @@ problems and has been fixed in 2.2.  To decrease the likelihood of this
 confusion happening again, netbeans_saved() has been renamed to
 netbeans_save_buffer().
 
-We are now at version 2.4.  For the differences between 2.3 and 2.4 search for
-"2.4" below.
+We are now at version 2.5.  For the differences between 2.4 and 2.5 search for
+"2.5" below.
 
 The messages are currently sent over a socket.  Since the messages are in
 plain UTF-8 text this protocol could also be used with any other communication
@@ -303,8 +324,11 @@ boolean		Argument with two possible values:
 
 number		Argument with a decimal number.
 
-optnum		Argument with either a decimal number or "none" (without the
-		quotes).
+color		Argument with either a decimal number, "none" (without the
+		quotes) or the name of a color (without the quotes) defined
+		both in the color list in |highlight-ctermfg| and in the color
+		list in |gui-colors|.
+		New in version 2.5.
 
 offset		A number argument that indicates a byte position in a buffer.
 		The first byte has offset zero.  Line breaks are counted for
@@ -365,9 +389,14 @@ defineAnnoType typeNum typeName tooltip glyphFile fg bg
 		   typeName	string	name that identifies this annotation
 		   tooltip	string	not used
 		   glyphFile	string	name of icon file
-		   fg		optnum	foreground color for line highlighting
-		   bg		optnum	background color for line highlighting
+		   fg		color	foreground color for line highlighting
+		   bg		color	background color for line highlighting
 		Vim will define a sign for the annotation.
+		When color is a number, this is the "#rrggbb" Red, Green and
+		Blue values of the color (see |gui-colors|) and the
+		highlighting is only defined for GVim.
+		When color is a name, this color is defined both for Vim
+		running in a color terminal and for GVim.
 		When both "fg" and "bg" are "none" no line highlighting is
 		used (new in version 2.1).
 		When "glyphFile" is empty, no text sign is used (new in
@@ -431,6 +460,7 @@ putBufferNumber pathname
 		New in version 2.1.
 
 raise		Bring the editor to the foreground.
+		Only when Vim is run with a GUI.
 		New in version 2.1.
 
 removeAnno serNum
@@ -520,6 +550,7 @@ showBalloon text
 		Show a balloon (popup window) at the mouse pointer position,
 		containing "text", a string argument.  The balloon should
 		disappear when the mouse is moved more than a few pixels.
+		Only when Vim is run with a GUI.
 		New in version 2.1.
 
 specialKeys
@@ -653,6 +684,7 @@ balloonText text
 		Used when 'ballooneval' is set and the mouse pointer rests on
 		some text for a moment.  "text" is a string, the text under
 		the mouse pointer.
+		Only when Vim is run with a GUI.
 		New in version 2.1.
 
 buttonRelease button lnum col
@@ -786,10 +818,22 @@ These errors occur when a message violates the protocol:
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. NetBeans key						*netbeans-key*
+7. NetBeans commands					*netbeans-commands*
+
+							*:nbstart* *E511* *E838*
+:nbs[tart] {connection}	Start a new Netbeans session with {connection} as the
+			socket connection parameters.  The format of
+			{connection} is described in |netbeans-parameters|.
+			At any time, one may check if the netbeans socket is
+			connected by running the command:
+			':echo has("netbeans_enabled")'
+
+							*:nbclose*
+:nbc[lose]		Close the current NetBeans session. Remove all placed
+			signs.
 
 							*:nbkey*
-:nbkey key		Pass the key to the Vim Controller for processing
+:nb[key] {key}		Pass the {key} to the Vim Controller for processing
 
 When a hot-key has been installed with the specialKeys command, this command
 can be used to generate a hotkey messages to the Vim Controller. The events
@@ -802,6 +846,13 @@ newDotAndMark, keyCommand and keyAtPos are generated (in this order).
 NUL bytes are not possible.  For editor -> IDE they will appear as NL
 characters.  For IDE -> editor they cannot be inserted.
 
+A NetBeans session may be initiated with Vim running in a terminal, and
+continued later in a GUI environment after running the |:gui| command. In this
+case, the highlighting defined for the NetBeans annotations may be cleared
+when the ":gui" command sources .gvimrc and this file loads a colorscheme
+that runs the command ":highlight clear".
+New in version 2.5.
+
 
 ==============================================================================
 9. Debugging NetBeans protocol				*netbeans-debugging*

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2010 Jan 06
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Oct 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -40,6 +40,7 @@ achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
 
 :se[t] no{option}	Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.
 
+							   *:set-!* *:set-inv*
 :se[t] {option}!   or
 :se[t] inv{option}	Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi}
 
@@ -136,7 +137,7 @@ A few special texts:
 	Last set from error handler ~
 		Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error.
 
-{not available when compiled without the +eval feature}
+{not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature}
 
 							*:set-termcap* *E522*
 For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a terminal option.  This will
@@ -272,10 +273,10 @@ You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
 			current buffer or window.  Not all options have a
 			local value.  If the option does not have a local
 			value the global value is set.
-			With the "all" argument: display all local option's
-			local values.
-			Without argument: Display all local option's local
-			values which are different from the default.
+			With the "all" argument: display local values for all
+			local options.
+			Without argument: Display local values for all local
+			options which are different from the default.
 			When displaying a specific local option, show the
 			local value.  For a global/local boolean option, when
 			the global value is being used, "--" is displayed
@@ -297,10 +298,10 @@ You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
 :setg[lobal] ...	Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
 			option without changing the local value.
 			When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
-			With the "all" argument: display all local option's
-			global values.
-			Without argument: display all local option's global
-			values which are different from the default.
+			With the "all" argument: display global values for all
+			local options.
+			Without argument: display global values for all local
+			options which are different from the default.
 			{not in Vi}
 
 For buffer-local and window-local options:
@@ -664,6 +665,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	"single":	Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII.  This is
 			expected by most users.
 	"double":	Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
+							*E834* *E835*
+	The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
+	contains a character that would be double width.
 
 	There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
 	those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
@@ -696,8 +700,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'autochdir' 'acd'	boolean (default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{only available when compiled with the
-			|+netbeans_intg| or |+sun_workshop| feature}
+			{only available when compiled with it, use
+			exists("+autochdir") to check}
 	When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you
 	open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.
 	It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened
@@ -1155,7 +1159,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'breakat' 'brk'		string	(default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the  |+linebreak|
+			{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
 			feature}
 	This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
 	break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit
@@ -1168,7 +1172,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			Win32 GUI}
 	Which directory to use for the file browser:
 	   last		Use same directory as with last file browser, where a
-	   		file was opened or saved.
+			file was opened or saved.
 	   buffer	Use the directory of the related buffer.
 	   current	Use the current directory.
 	   {path}	Use the specified directory
@@ -1315,7 +1319,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'charconvert' 'ccv'	string (default "")
 			global
 			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
-			feature and the |+eval| feature}
+			and |+eval| features}
 			{not in Vi}
 	An expression that is used for character encoding conversion.  It is
 	evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
@@ -1449,6 +1453,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			as HTML.  This works to copy rendered HTML from
 			Firefox, paste it as raw HTML in Vim, select the HTML
 			in Vim and paste it in a rich edit box in Firefox.
+			You probably want to add this only temporarily,
+			possibly use BufEnter autocommands.
 			Only supported for GTK version 2 and later.
 			Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature.
 
@@ -1490,6 +1496,25 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			feature}
 	Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
 
+						*'colorcolumn'* *'cc'*
+'colorcolumn' 'cc'	string	(default "")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
+			feature}
+	'colorcolumn' is a comma separated list of screen columns that are
+	highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|.  Useful to align
+	text.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
+	The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with
+	'+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. >
+
+		:set cc=+1  " highlight column after 'textwidth'
+		:set cc=+1,+2,+3  " highlight three columns after 'textwidth'
+		:hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey
+<
+	When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used.
+	A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted.
+
 						*'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
 'columns' 'co'		number	(default 80 or terminal width)
 			global
@@ -1618,7 +1643,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	'whichwrap'	+ ""		left-right movements don't wrap
 	'wildchar'	+ CTRL-E	only when the current value is <Tab>
 					use CTRL-E for cmdline completion
-	'writebackup'	  on or off	depends on +writebackup feature
+	'writebackup'	  on or off	depends on the |+writebackup| feature
 
 						*'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
 'complete' 'cpt'	string	(default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")
@@ -1668,8 +1693,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'completefunc' 'cfu'	string	(default: empty)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +eval
-			or +insert_expand feature}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
+			or |+insert_expand| features}
 	This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion
 	with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
 	See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
@@ -1704,6 +1729,55 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		    combination with "menu" or "menuone".
 
 
+						*'concealcursor'* *'cocu'*
+'concealcursor' 'cocu'	string (default: "")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+conceal|
+			feature}
+	Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed.
+	When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in
+	other lines.
+	  n		Normal mode
+	  v		Visual mode
+	  i		Insert mode
+	  c		Command line editing, for 'incsearch'
+
+	'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor.
+	A useful value is "nc".  This is used in help files.  So long as you
+	are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text
+	or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that
+	you can see what you are doing.
+	Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's
+	displayed.  E.g., when moving vertically it may change column.
+
+
+'conceallevel' 'cole'		*'conceallevel'* *'cole'*
+			number (default 0)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+conceal|
+			feature}
+	Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal|
+	is shown:
+
+	Value		Effect ~
+	0		Text is shown normally
+	1		Each block of concealed text is replaced with one
+			character.  If the syntax item does not have a custom
+			replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the
+			character defined in 'listchars' is used (default is a
+			space).
+			It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group.
+	2		Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a
+			custom replacement character defined (see
+			|:syn-cchar|).
+	3		Concealed text is completely hidden.
+
+	Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can
+	edit and copy the text.  This can be changed with the 'concealcursor'
+	option.
+
 				*'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
 'confirm' 'cf'		boolean (default off)
 			global
@@ -1883,8 +1957,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			parenthesis match.  When included "%" ignores
 			backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
 								*cpo-n*
-		n	When included, the column used for 'number' will also
-			be used for text of wrapped lines.
+		n	When included, the column used for 'number' and
+			'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped
+			lines.
 								*cpo-o*
 		o	Line offset to search command is not remembered for
 			next search.
@@ -2047,6 +2122,36 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			with system specific functions.
 
 
+						*'cryptmethod'* *'cm'*
+'cryptmethod'		string	(default "zip")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	Method used for encryption when the buffer is written to a file:
+							*pkzip*
+	   zip		PkZip compatible method.  A weak kind of encryption.
+			Backwards compatible with Vim 7.2 and older.
+							*blowfish*
+	   blowfish	Blowfish method.  Strong encryption.  Requires Vim 7.3
+			or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older.
+			This adds a "seed" to the file, every time you write
+			the file the encrypted bytes will be different.
+
+	When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically
+	to the detected method of the file being read.  Thus if you write it
+	without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used.
+	Changing 'cryptmethod' does not mark the file as modified, you have to
+	explicitly write it, you don't get a warning unless there are other
+	modifications.  Also see |:X|.
+
+	When setting the global value to an empty string, it will end up with
+	the value "zip".  When setting the local value to an empty string the
+	buffer will use the global value.
+
+	When a new encryption method is added in a later version of Vim, and
+	the current version does not recognize it, you will get	*E821* .
+	You need to edit this file with the later version of Vim.
+
+
 						*'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'*
 'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc'	number	(default 0)
 			global
@@ -2104,12 +2209,26 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Give messages when adding a cscope database.  See |cscopeverbose|.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
+			*'cursorbind'* *'crb'* *'nocursorbind'* *'nocrb'*
+'cursorbind' 'crb'	boolean  (default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cursorbind|
+			feature}
+	When this option is set, as the cursor in the current
+	window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have
+	this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and
+	column.  This option is useful for viewing the
+	differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode,
+	inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are
+	taken into account.
+
 
 			*'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'*
 'cursorcolumn' 'cuc'	boolean	(default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the  |+syntax|
+			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
 			feature}
 	Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn
 	|hl-CursorColumn|.  Useful to align text.  Will make screen redrawing
@@ -2124,7 +2243,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'cursorline' 'cul'	boolean	(default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the  |+syntax|
+			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
 			feature}
 	Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine
 	|hl-CursorLine|.  Useful to easily spot the cursor.  Will make screen
@@ -2344,7 +2463,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'eadirection' 'ead'	string	(default "both")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
+			{not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
 			feature}
 	Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
 		ver	vertically, width of windows is not affected
@@ -2375,6 +2494,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
 	starts up.  See |multibyte|.  To reload the menus see |:menutrans|.
 
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline|.  It would most likely
+	corrupt the text.
+
 	NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to
 	"utf-8".  Although care has been taken to allow different values of
 	'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and
@@ -2558,6 +2680,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			feature}
 			{not in Vi}
 	Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.
+
 	When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be
 	done when writing the file.  For reading see below.
 	When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be
@@ -2570,24 +2693,32 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion
 		results in the same text.  When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some
 		characters may be lost!
+
 	See 'encoding' for the possible values.  Additionally, values may be
 	specified that can be handled by the converter, see
 	|mbyte-conversion|.
+
 	When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
 	To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
 	'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.  One exception: when
 	'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used.
 	For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used.
+
 	Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
 	When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
 	you can set it with uppercase values too.  '_' characters are
 	replaced with '-'.  If a name is recognized from the list for
 	'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name.  For example
 	"ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".
+
 	When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
 	option is set, because the file would be different when written.
-	If you do this in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to
-	avoid this.
+
+	Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens
+	AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be
+	written.  If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set
+	'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q".
+
 	This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
 
 							*'fe'*
@@ -2705,13 +2836,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
 	     is set to "unix".  Note that when a <NL> is found without a
 	     preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
-	  3. If 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
-	     This means that "mac" is only chosen when "unix" is not present,
-	     or when no <NL> is found in the file, and when "dos" is not
-	     present, or no <CR><NL> is present in the file.
-	     Also if "unix" was first chosen, but the first <CR> is before
-	     the first <NL> and there appears to be more <CR>'s than <NL>'s in
-	     the file, then 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
+	  3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if 'fileformats'
+	     includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
+	     This means that "mac" is only chosen when:
+	      "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and
+	      "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file.
+	     Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before
+	     the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in
 	  4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
 	     'fileformats' is used.
 	  When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
@@ -2850,7 +2981,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
-			or |+eval| feature}
+			or |+eval| features}
 	The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
 	for each line to obtain its fold level.  See |fold-expr|.
 
@@ -3049,12 +3180,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
 			feature}
 	Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq|
-	operator.  When this option is empty 'formatprg' is used.
+	operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions').  When this
+	option is empty 'formatprg' is used.
 
 	The |v:lnum|  variable holds the first line to be formatted.
 	The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.
 	The |v:char|  variable holds the character that is going to be
-		      inserted.  This can be empty.  Don't insert it yet!
+		      inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to
+		      automatic formatting.  This can be empty.  Don't insert
+		      it yet!
 
 	Example: >
 		:set formatexpr=mylang#Format()
@@ -3065,8 +3199,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	text beyond that limit.  This happens under the same conditions as
 	when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
 	same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
-	return "i" or "R" in this situation.  When the function returns
-	non-zero Vim will fall back to using the internal format mechanism.
+	return "i" or "R" in this situation.
+	
+	When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
+	the internal format mechanism.
 
 	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
 	|sandbox-option|.
@@ -3424,15 +3560,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  'i'	Use a Vim icon.  For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
 		corner of the window.  It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
 		limitations of X11.  For a color icon, see |X11-icon|.
-	  							*'go-m'*
+								*'go-m'*
 	  'm'	Menu bar is present.
-	  							*'go-M'*
+								*'go-M'*
 	  'M'	The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced.  Note
 		that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
 		switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc|
 		file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
 		":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
-	  							*'go-g'*
+								*'go-g'*
 	  'g'	Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey.  If
 		'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
 		Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.
@@ -3444,36 +3580,36 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		and Athena GUIs.
 								*'go-r'*
 	  'r'	Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
-	  							*'go-R'*
+								*'go-R'*
 	  'R'	Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
 		split window.
-	  							*'go-l'*
+								*'go-l'*
 	  'l'	Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
-	  							*'go-L'*
+								*'go-L'*
 	  'L'	Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
 		split window.
 								*'go-b'*
 	  'b'	Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present.  Its size depends on
 		the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
 		flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
-	  							*'go-h'*
+								*'go-h'*
 	  'h'	Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
 		line.  Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|
 
 	And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
 	you really want to :-).  See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.
 
-	  							*'go-v'*
+								*'go-v'*
 	  'v'	Use a vertical button layout for dialogs.  When not included,
 		a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
 		vertical layout is used anyway.
-	  							*'go-p'*
+								*'go-p'*
 	  'p'	Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI.  This is required for some
 		window managers.  If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
 		the right moment, try adding this flag.  This must be done
 		before starting the GUI.  Set it in your |gvimrc|.  Adding or
 		removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
-	  							*'go-F'*
+								*'go-F'*
 	  'F'	Add a footer.  Only for Motif.  See |gui-footer|.
 
 
@@ -3490,7 +3626,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
-			with the +windows feature}
+			with the |+windows| feature}
 	When nonempty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab
 	pages line.  When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a
 	default label.  See |setting-guitablabel| for more info.
@@ -3507,7 +3643,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
-			with the +windows feature}
+			with the |+windows| feature}
 	When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab
 	pages line.  When empty Vim will use a default tooltip.
 	This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above.
@@ -3534,7 +3670,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'helpheight' 'hh'	number	(default 20)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
 	":help" command.  The initial height of the help window is half of the
@@ -3587,7 +3723,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
 				     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
 				     >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,
-				     R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal,
+				     R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,
 				     +:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel,
 				     x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb")
 			global
@@ -3607,7 +3743,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|hl-Search|	 l  last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')
 	|hl-MoreMsg|	 m  |more-prompt|
 	|hl-ModeMsg|	 M  Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
-	|hl-LineNr|	 n  line number for ":number" and ":#" commands
+	|hl-LineNr|	 n  line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and
+			    when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set.
 	|hl-Question|	 r  |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
 	|hl-StatusLine|	 s  status line of current window |status-line|
 	|hl-StatusLineNC| S  status lines of not-current windows
@@ -3627,9 +3764,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|hl-DiffText|	 T  inserted text in diff mode
 	|hl-SignColumn|	 >  column used for |signs|
 	|hl-SpellBad|	 B  misspelled word |spell|
-	|hl-SpellCap|	 P  word that should start with capital|spell|
+	|hl-SpellCap|	 P  word that should start with capital |spell|
 	|hl-SpellRare|	 R  rare word |spell|
 	|hl-SpellLocal|	 L  word from other region |spell|
+	|hl-Conceal|	 -  the placeholders used for concealed characters
+			    (see 'conceallevel')
 	|hl-Pmenu|       +  popup menu normal line
 	|hl-PmenuSel|    =  popup menu normal line
 	|hl-PmenuSbar|   x  popup menu scrollbar
@@ -3759,7 +3898,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
-			|+GUI_GTK|}
+			|+GUI_GTK|}				*E599*
 	Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for
 	activation.  When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control
 	IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.
@@ -3790,8 +3929,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'imcmdline' 'imc'	boolean (default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{only available when compiled with the |+xim|
-			|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+xim|,
+			|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| features}
 	When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
 	line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
 	Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
@@ -3802,8 +3941,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'imdisable' 'imd'	boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{only available when compiled with the |+xim|
-			|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+xim|,
+			|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| features}
 	When set the Input Method is never used.  This is useful to disable
 	the IM when it doesn't work properly.
 	Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines.  This
@@ -3873,7 +4012,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the
-			|+find_in_path| or |+eval| feature}
+			|+find_in_path| or |+eval| features}
 	Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
 	option to a file name.  Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
 		:set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
@@ -3894,7 +4033,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the
-			|+extra_search| feature}
+			|+extra_search| features}
 	While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
 	so far, matches.  The matched string is highlighted.  If the pattern
 	is invalid or not found, nothing is shown.  The screen will be updated
@@ -3910,7 +4049,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'.
 	See also: 'hlsearch'.
 	CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match
-	to the command line.
+	to the command line.  If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the
+	command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is
+	converted to lowercase.
 	CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current
 	match, excluding the characters that were already typed.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
@@ -4137,8 +4278,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'key'			string	(default "")
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+cryptv|
+			feature}
 	The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.
-	See |encryption|.
+	See |encryption| and 'cryptmethod'.
 	Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed
 	key.  Use the |:X| command.  But you can make 'key' empty: >
 		:set key=
@@ -4283,7 +4426,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'linebreak' 'lbr'	boolean	(default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the  |+linebreak|
+			{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
 			feature}
 	If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
 	than at the last character that fits on the screen.  Unlike
@@ -4369,8 +4512,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'listchars' 'lcs'	string	(default "eol:$")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-	Strings to use in 'list' mode.  It is a comma separated list of string
-	settings.
+	Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
+	comma separated list of string settings.
 	  eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
 			omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
 			line.
@@ -4387,6 +4530,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  precedes:c	Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
 			is off and there is text preceding the character
 			visible in the first column.
+	  conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
+			'conceallevel' is set to 1.
 	  nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
 			0xA0, 160).  Left blank when omitted.
 
@@ -4519,7 +4664,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd'	number	(default 100)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +eval
+			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
 			feature}
 	Maximum depth of function calls for user functions.  This normally
 	catches endless recursion.  When using a recursive function with
@@ -4849,7 +4994,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
 	alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
 		incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
-		letter index a), b), etc.
+		letter index a), b), etc.			*octal-number*
 	octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
 		to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
 	hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
@@ -4870,6 +5015,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
 	characters are put before the number.
 	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
+	When setting this option, 'relativenumber' is reset.
 
 						*'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
 'numberwidth' 'nuw'	number	(Vim default: 4  Vi default: 8)
@@ -4878,13 +5024,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{only available when compiled with the |+linebreak|
 			feature}
 	Minimal number of columns to use for the line number.  Only relevant
-	when the 'number' option is set or printing lines with a line number.
-	Since one space is always between the number and the text, there is
-	one less character for the number itself.
+	when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines
+	with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and
+	the text, there is one less character for the number itself.
 	The value is the minimum width.  A bigger width is used when needed to
-	fit the highest line number in the buffer.  Thus with the Vim default
-	of 4 there is room for a line number up to 999.  When the buffer has
-	1000 lines five columns will be used.
+	fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of
+	rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber'
+	is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number
+	up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used.
 	The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10.
 	NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set.
 
@@ -4892,8 +5039,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'omnifunc' 'ofu'	string	(default: empty)
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +eval
-			or +insert_expand feature}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+eval|
+			or |+insert_expand| features}
 	This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni
 	completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
 	See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
@@ -5121,7 +5268,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
-			|+quickfix| feature}
+			|+quickfix| features}
 	Default height for a preview window.  Used for |:ptag| and associated
 	commands.  Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
 
@@ -5131,7 +5278,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
-			|+quickfix| feature}
+			|+quickfix| features}
 	Identifies the preview window.  Only one window can have this option
 	set.  It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
 	|:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
@@ -5258,6 +5405,25 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	matches will be highlighted.  This is used to avoid that Vim hangs
 	when using a very complicated pattern.
 
+		*'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'*
+'relativenumber' 'rnu'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+	Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of
+	each line. Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can
+	precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without
+	having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with
+	other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =).
+	When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped
+	line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when
+	'compatible' isn't set).
+	The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
+	number.
+	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
+	characters are put before the number.
+	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
+	When setting this option, 'number' is reset.
+
 						*'remap'* *'noremap'*
 'remap'			boolean	(default on)
 			global
@@ -5317,7 +5483,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
 	in different windows).  Also see |rileft.txt|.
 
-			*'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* *'norightleftcmd'* *'norlc'*
+			*'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'*
 'rightleftcmd' 'rlc'	string	(default "search")
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -5603,7 +5769,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 					       help,options,tabpages,winsize")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +mksession
+			{not available when compiled without the |+mksession|
 			feature}
 	Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command.  It is a comma
 	separated list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring
@@ -5708,7 +5874,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	in a file and echoed to the screen.  If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
 	"tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee".  If the
 	'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes
-	"2>&1| tee".  This means that stderr is also included.
+	"2>&1| tee".  This means that stderr is also included.  Before using
+	the 'shell' option a path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses "sh".
 	The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
 	and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
 	there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
@@ -5912,14 +6079,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'showbreak' 'sbr'	string	(default "")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the  |+linebreak|
+			{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
 			feature}
 	String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped.  Useful
 	values are "> " or "+++ ": >
 		:set showbreak=>\ 
 <	Note the backslash to escape the trailing space.  It's easier like
 	this: >
-		:let &showbreak = '+++ ' 
+		:let &showbreak = '+++ '
 <	Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
 	comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
 	part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
@@ -5940,6 +6107,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	option off if your terminal is slow.
 	In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
 	- When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
+	  If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6"
+	  means two characters and six bytes.
 	- When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
 	- When selecting a block, the size in screen characters:
 	  {lines}x{columns}.
@@ -5994,7 +6163,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'showtabline' 'stal'	number	(default 1)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels
 	will be displayed:
@@ -6269,7 +6438,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'splitbelow' 'sb'	boolean	(default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
 	one. |:split|
@@ -6278,7 +6447,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'splitright' 'spr'	boolean	(default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
+			{not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
 			feature}
 	When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
 	current one. |:vsplit|
@@ -6360,6 +6529,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]".  See 'filetype'.
 	Y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM".  See 'filetype'.
 	      {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
+	q S   "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty.
 	k S   Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
 	      being used: "<keymap>"
 	n N   Buffer number.
@@ -6538,7 +6708,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			a buffer.  Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
 			Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
 	   newtab	Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
-	   		"split" when both are present.
+			"split" when both are present.
 
 						*'synmaxcol'* *'smc'*
 'synmaxcol' 'smc'	number	(default 3000)
@@ -6587,7 +6757,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'tabline' 'tal'		string	(default empty)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	When nonempty, this option determines the content of the tab pages
 	line at the top of the Vim window.  When empty Vim will use a default
@@ -6596,7 +6766,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline'
 	option and only when there is no GUI tab line.  When 'e' is in
 	'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used
-	instead.
+	instead.  Note that the two tab pages lines are very different.
 
 	The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'.  You can use
 	|tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out
@@ -6611,7 +6781,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'tabpagemax' 'tpm'	number	(default 10)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line
 	argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage|
@@ -6717,8 +6887,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	'cpoptions'.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  Also see
 	|tags-option|.
 	"*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
-	a directory tree.  See |file-searching|.  {not available when compiled
-	without the |+path_extra| feature}
+	a directory tree.  See |file-searching|.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will
+	find all files named "tags" below "/lib".  The filename itself cannot
+	contain wildcards, it is used as-is.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find
+	files called "tags?".  {not available when compiled without the
+	|+path_extra| feature}
 	The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names
 	actually used.
 	If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag
@@ -7171,6 +7344,38 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 	Alias for 'term', see above.
 
+						*'undodir'* *'udir'*
+'undodir' 'udir'	string	(default ".")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature}
+	List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas.
+	See |'backupdir'| for details of the format.
+	"." means using the directory of the file.  The undo file name for
+	"file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~".
+	For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited
+	file, with path separators replaced with "%".
+	When writing: The first directory that exists is used. "." always
+	works, no directories after "." will be used for writing.
+	When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file.  The first
+	undo file that exists is used.  When it cannot be read an error is
+	given, no further entry is used.
+	See |undo-persistence|.
+
+						*'undofile'* *'udf'*
+'undofile' 'udf'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature}
+	When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when
+	writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same
+	file on buffer read.
+	The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'.
+	For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
+	The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
+	before a reload to be saved for undo.
+	WARNING: this is a very new feature.  Use at your own risk!
+
 						*'undolevels'* *'ul'*
 'undolevels' 'ul'	number	(default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
 						Win32 and OS/2)
@@ -7184,10 +7389,27 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		set ul=0
 <	But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
 	'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
+	Also see |undo-two-ways|.
 	Set to a negative number for no undo at all: >
 		set ul=-1
 <	This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
-	Also see |undo-two-ways|.
+	Also see |clear-undo|.
+
+						*'undoreload'* *'ur'*
+'undoreload' 'ur'	number	(default 10000)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it.  This applies to the
+	":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of
+	Vim. |FileChangedShell|
+	The save only happens when this options is negative or when the number
+	of lines is smaller than the value of this option.
+	Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.
+
+	When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read.
+
+	Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory.  Set
+	this option to a lower value if you run out of memory.
 
 						*'updatecount'* *'uc'*
 'updatecount' 'uc'	number	(default: 200)
@@ -7244,7 +7466,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.
 	When the file exists messages are appended.
 	Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made
-	empty.
+	empty.  Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time.
 	Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.
 	The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not
 	displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.
@@ -7258,7 +7480,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +mksession
+			{not available when compiled without the |+mksession|
 			feature}
 	Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
@@ -7268,7 +7490,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'viewoptions' 'vop'	string	(default: "folds,options,cursor")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +mksession
+			{not available when compiled without the |+mksession|
 			feature}
 	Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command.  It is a comma separated
 	list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring something:
@@ -7294,7 +7516,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				   for others: '100,<50,s10,h)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the  |+viminfo|
+			{not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
 			feature}
 	When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
 	when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|).  The string should be a comma
@@ -7308,8 +7530,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	!	When included, save and restore global variables that start
 		with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
 		letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
-		and "_K_L_M" are not.  Only String and Number types are
-		stored.
+		and "_K_L_M" are not.  Nested List and Dict items may not be
+		read back correctly, you end up with a string representation
+		instead.
 	"	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
 		the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
 		backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
@@ -7658,7 +7881,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'winheight' 'wh'	number	(default 1)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	Minimal number of lines for the current window.  This is not a hard
 	minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room.  If the
@@ -7681,7 +7904,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'winfixheight' 'wfh'	boolean	(default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
 	'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.  Set by default for the
@@ -7692,7 +7915,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'winfixwidth' 'wfw'	boolean	(default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and
 	'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.
@@ -7702,7 +7925,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'winminheight' 'wmh'	number	(default 1)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
 			feature}
 	The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
 	This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
@@ -7718,7 +7941,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'winminwidth' 'wmw'	number	(default 1)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
+			{not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
 			feature}
 	The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
 	This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
@@ -7735,7 +7958,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'winwidth' 'wiw'	number	(default 20)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
+			{not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
 			feature}
 	Minimal number of columns for the current window.  This is not a hard
 	minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room.  If

runtime/doc/os_390.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_390.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Dec 17
+*os_390.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 May 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Ralf Schandl
@@ -6,24 +6,12 @@
 					*zOS* *z/OS* *OS390* *os390* *MVS*
 This file contains the particulars for the z/OS UNIX version of Vim.
 
-1. Open source on z/OS UNIX		|zOS-open-source|
-2. Your feedback is needed		|zOS-feedback|
-3. Building VIM for z/OS UNIX		|zOS-building|
-4. ASCII/EBCDIC dependent scripts	|zOS-has-ebcdic|
-5. XTerm Problems			|zOS-xterm|
-6. Motif Problems			|zOS-Motif|
-7. Bugs					|zOS-Bugs|
-8. Known weaknesses			|zOS-weaknesses|
-9. Changes				|zOS-changes|
-
-DISCLAIMER: ~
-We are IBM employees, but IBM is not responsible for this port.  This is our
-private fun, and is provided in the hopes that it may be useful to others.
-
-Please note that this software has NOT been submitted to any formal IBM
-testing and is published AS IS.  Please do not contact IBM for support for this
-software, as it is not an official component of any IBM product.  IT IS NOT
-SUPPORTED, GUARANTEED, OR RELATED WHATSOEVER TO IBM.
+1. ASCII/EBCDIC dependent scripts	|zOS-has-ebcdic|
+2. Putty and Colors                     |zOS-PuTTY|
+3. Motif Problems			|zOS-Motif|
+4. Bugs					|zOS-Bugs|
+5. Limitations     			|zOS-limitations|
+6. Open source on z/OS UNIX		|zOS-open-source|
 
 Contributors: ~
 The port to z/OS UNIX was done by Ralf Schandl for the Redbook mentioned
@@ -32,128 +20,11 @@ below.
 Changes, bug-reports, or both by:
 
 	David Moore
-	Anthony Giorgio <agiorgio@fastmail.fm>
+	Anthony Giorgio
 	and others
 
-This document was written by Ralf Schandl and revised by Anthony Giorgio.
-
 ==============================================================================
-1. Open source on z/OS UNIX		*OS390-open-source* *zOS-open-source*
-
-If you are interested in other Open Source Software on z/OS UNIX, have a
-look at the following Redbook:
-
-    Mike MacIsaac et al
-    "Open Source Software for z/OS and OS/390 UNIX"
-    IBM Form Number: SG24-5944-01
-    ISBN: 0738424633
-
-You can find out more information, order a hard copy, or download a PDF
-version of these Redbooks at:
-
-	    http://www.redbooks.ibm.com
-
-==============================================================================
-2. Your feedback is needed		*OS390-feedback* *zOS-feedback*
-
-Vim should compile, link, and run right out of the box on a standard IBM z/OS
-UNIX mainframe.  I've personally run it on z/OS V1R2 and V1R3 machines without
-problems.
-
-Many changes had to be done to the code to port Vim to z/OS UNIX.  As like
-most UNIX programs, Vim contained heavy ASCII dependencies.  I might have
-missed an ASCII dependency, or it is possible that a new one has been added
-with a feature or bug fix.  Most programmers are simply not aware of possible
-ASCII/EBCDIC conversion issues.  If you hit a problem that seems related to
-this, feel free to contact us at the email addresses above.
-
-One indication of ASCII/EBCDIC conversion problems is screen corruption with
-"unprintable" characters.  For example, at one point the errorbell was broken
-in Vim.  Any time Vim tried to ring the terminal bell an ASCII character 0x07
-would be printed.  This works fine on most terminals, but is broken on an
-EBCDIC one.  The correct solution was to define a different value for the bell
-character on EBCDIC systems.
-
-Remember, it's only possible to fix a bug if the community knows about it.
-Don't rely on someone else to report it!  See the section |bug-reports|.
-
-==============================================================================
-3. Building VIM for z/OS UNIX		*OS390-building* *zOS-building*
-
-A word on debugging code first: ~
-
-The normal run of configure adds the flag '-g' to the compiler options,
-to include debugging information into the executable.  This information
-are normally removed from the executable with the strip command during
-installation.  On z/OS UNIX, it is not possible to remove this from
-the executable.  The strip command exists on z/OS UNIX and is called
-during the installation, but it does nothing.  It is equivalent to the
-'touch' command.  This is due to the way debug symbols are stored in the
-objects generated by the compiler.
-
-If you want to build Vim without debugging code, export the environment
-variable CFLAGS set to an empty string before you call the configure script.
->
-	export CFLAGS=""
-
-
-Building without X11: ~
-
-Note: Use cc to build Vim.  The c89 compiler has stricter syntax checking
-and will not compile Vim cleanly.
-
-If you build VIM without X11 support, compiling and building is
-straightforward.  Don't forget to export _CC_CCMODE=1 before calling
-configure and make.
->
-    $ export _CC_CCMODE=1
-    $./configure --with-features=big --without-x --enable-gui=no
-    $ make
-    $ make test
-<
-	Test notes:
-	Test 11 will fail if you do not have gzip installed.
-	Test 42 will fail, as VIM on z/OS UNIX doesn't support the multibyte
-	feature.  (David Moore: "Doesn't work _yet_!  :-)  I'll see what I
-	can do.")
->
-
-    $ make install
-
-
-Building with X11: ~
-
-There are two ways for building Vim with X11 support.  You can link it
-statically with the X11 libraries or can bind it with the X11 DLLs.  The
-statically linked version results in a huge executable (~13MB), while the
-dynamically linked executable is much smaller (~4.5MB).
-
-Here is what you do, if you want Motif:
-
-  a) Static link >
-	$ configure --with-features=big --enable-gui=motif
-	$ make
-<
-     VIM is now linked statically with the X11 libraries.
-
-  b) Dynamic link:
-     Make VIM as described for the static link.  Then change the contents of
-     the 'auto/link.sed' file by appending: >
-	s%-lXm  *%/usr/lib/Xm.x %g
-	s%-lX11  *%/usr/lib/X11.x %g
-	s%-lSM  *%/usr/lib/SM.x %g
-	s%-lICE  *%/usr/lib/ICE.x %g
-<
-     Then do: >
-	$ rm vim
-	$ make
-<
-     Now Vim is linked with the X11-DLLs.
-
-See the Makefile and the file link.sh on how link.sed is used.
-
-==============================================================================
-4. ASCII/EBCDIC dependent scripts	*OS390-has-ebcdic* *zOS-has-ebcdic*
+1. ASCII/EBCDIC dependent scripts	*OS390-has-ebcdic* *zOS-has-ebcdic*
 
 For the internal script language the feature "ebcdic" was added.  With this
 you can fix ASCII dependent scripts like this:
@@ -164,24 +35,28 @@ you can fix ASCII dependent scripts like this:
 	let space = 32
     endif
 <
+
 ==============================================================================
-5. XTerm problems			*OS390-xterm* *zOS-xterm*
+2. PuTTY and Colors			*OS390-PuTTY* *zOS-PuTTY*
 
-Note: This problem was resolved in version 6.1b. ~
+If you see problems with syntax highlighting or screen corruptions when you
+connect to z/OS using Putty, try the following:
 
-I saw one problem with XTerm on z/OS UNIX.  The terminal code for moving the
-cursor to the left is wrong in the termlib database.  Perhaps not wrong, but
-it didn't work with VIM syntax highlighting and command line cursor movement.
+- Configure Putty as "vt220" terminal (Connection->Data)
+- Add the following 3 lines to your vimrc:
 
-If the highlighting is messed up while you type, but is okay after you refreshed
-the screen with <C-L> or if you can't move to the left with the cursor key on
-the command line, try adding >
-	:set t_le=^H
+>
+    set t_AB=[4%p1%dm
+    set t_AF=[3%p1%dm
+    set t_CO=8
 <
-to your .vimrc.  Note: '^H' is one character, hit <C-V><C-H> to get it.
+
+Note:  is one character use <C-V><Esc> to enter it.
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Motif Problems			*OS390-Motif* *zOS-Motif*
+3. Motif Problems			*OS390-Motif* *zOS-Motif*
+
+Note: Seen with Vim 6.*, never tested since.
 
 It seems that in porting the Motif library to z/OS, a translation from EBCDIC
 to ASCII for the accelerator characters of the pull-down menus was forgotten.
@@ -190,17 +65,17 @@ to only work for the opening of menus (like <Alt-F> to open the file menu).
 They still do not work for the menu items themselves (like <Alt-F>O to open
 the file browser).
 
-There is no solution for this as of yet.
+There is no solution for this yet.
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. Bugs					*OS390-bugs* *zOS-Bugs*
+4. Bugs					*OS390-bugs* *zOS-Bugs*
 
 - Vim will consistently hang when a large amount of text is selected in
   visual block mode.  This may be due to a memory corruption issue.  Note that
   this occurs in both the terminal and gui versions.
 
 ==============================================================================
-8. Known weaknesses			*OS390-weaknesses* *zOS-weaknesses*
+5. Limitations     			*OS390-limitations* *zOS-limitations*
 
 - No binary search in tag files.
   The program /bin/sort sorts by ASCII value by default.  This program is
@@ -208,9 +83,6 @@ There is no solution for this as of yet.
   ctags out there, that does it right, but we can't be sure.  So this seems to
   be a permanent restriction.
 
-- Multibyte support (utf-8) doesn't work, it's disabled at compile time.
-  (|multibyte|)
-
 - The cscope interface (|cscope|) doesn't work for the version of cscope
   that we use on our mainframe.  We have a copy of version 15.0b12, and it
   causes Vim to hang when using the "cscope add" command.  I'm guessing that
@@ -221,6 +93,13 @@ There is no solution for this as of yet.
 
 - No glib/gtk support.  I have not been able to successfully compile glib on
   z/OS UNIX.  This means you'll have to live without the pretty gtk toolbar.
+ 
+Disabled at compile time:
+    - Multibyte support         (|multibyte|)
+    - Right-to-left mode        (|rileft|)
+    - Farsi key map             (|Farsi|)
+    - Arabic language support   (|Arabic|)
+    - Spell checking            (|spell|)
 
 Never tested:
     - Perl interface		(|perl|)
@@ -233,108 +112,24 @@ Never tested:
     - TCL interface		(|tcl|)
     ...
 
-If you try any of these features and they work, drop us a note!
-
 ==============================================================================
-9. Changes				*OS390-changes*	*zOS-changes*
+6. Open source on z/OS UNIX		*OS390-open-source* *zOS-open-source*
 
-This is a small reference of the changes made to the z/OS port of Vim.  It is
-not an exhaustive summary of all the modifications made to the code base.
+If you are interested in other Open Source Software on z/OS UNIX, have a
+look at the following Redbook:
 
-6.1b (beta):
-  Changed KS_LE in term.c to be "\b" instead of "\010"  This fixed the
-  screen corruption problems in gVim reported by Anthony Giorgio.
+    Mike MacIsaac et al
+    "Open Source Software for z/OS and OS/390 UNIX"
+    IBM Form Number: SG24-5944-01
+    ISBN: 0738424633
+    http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/resources/servers_eserver_zseries_zos_unix_redbook_sg245944.pdf
 
-  Anthony Giorgio updated this document:
-	- Changed OS/390 to z/OS where appropriate.  IBM decided to rename
-		all of its servers and operating systems.  z/OS and OS/390
-		are the same product, but the version numbering system was
-		reset for the name change (e.g. OS/390 V2R11 == z/OS V1R1).
-	- Added information about second edition of the Open Source Redbook.
-	- Moved Redbook information to a separate section.
-	- Various tweaks and changes.
-	- Updated testing section.
-
-6.0au:
-  Changed configure.in
-  Changed documentation.
-  Anthony Giorgio fixed the errorbell.
-
-  David Moore found some problems, which were fixed by Bram and/or David for
-  6.0au.
-
-6.0q (alpha):
-  Minor changes for nrformats=alpha (see |'nrformats'|).
-  Problem with hard-coded keycode for the English pound sign.  Added a define in
-  ascii.h
-  Disabled multibyte for EBCDIC in feature.h
-
-6.0f (alpha):
-  First compile of Vim 6 on z/OS UNIX.  Some minor changes were needed.
-
-  Finally found the reason why make from the top level didn't work (I must have
-  been blind before!).  The Makefile contained a list of targets in one target
-  line.  On all other UNIX's the macro $@ evaluates to the first target in this
-  list, only on z/OS UNIX it evaluates to the last one :-(.
-
-5.6-390d:
-  Cleaned up some hacks.
-
-5.6-390c:
-  I grepped through the source and examined every spot with a character
-  involved in an operation (+-).  I hope I now found all EBCDIC/ASCII
-  stuff, but ....
-
-  Fixed:
-    - fixed warning message in do_fixdel()
-    - fixed translation from Ctrl-Char to symbolic name (like ^h to CTRL-H)
-	    for :help
-    - fixed yank/delete/... into register
-    - fixed :register command
-    - fixed viminfo register storing
-    - fixed quick-access table in findoptions()
-    - fixed 'g^H' select mode
-    - fixed tgetstr() 'get terminal capability string', ESC and
-	    Ctrl chars where wrong.  (Not used on OS/390 UNIX)
+Also look at:
+    http://www.redbooks.ibm.com
+    http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/z/os/zos/features/unix/
+    http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/z/os/zos/features/unix/library/IBM+Redbooks/index.html
 
 
-  ctags:
-    - added trigraphs support (used in prolog of system header files)
-	    (get.c)
-    - fixed sorting order with LC_COLLATE=S390 to force EBCDIC sorting.
-	    (sort.c)
-
-5.6-390b:
-  Changed:
-    - configure.in:
-	- added test for OS/390 UNIX
-	- added special compiler and linker options if building with X11
-    - configure:
-	- after created via autoconf hand-edited it to make the test for
-	  ICEConnectionNumber work.  This is an autoconf problem.  OS/390 UNIX
-	  needs -lX11 for this.
-    - Makefile
-	- Don't include the lib directories ('-L...') into the variable
-	  ALL_LIBS.  Use own variable ALL_LIB_DIRS instead.  A fully POSIX
-	  compliant compiler must not accept objects/libraries and options
-	  mixed.  Now we can call the linker like this:
-
-	    $(CC) $(LDFLAGS) $(ALL_LIB_DIRS) $(OBJ) $(ALL_LIBS)
-
-  Fixed:
-    - Double quote couldn't be entered
-      Missed ASCII dependencies while setting up terminal
-      In ASCII 127 is the delete char, in EBCDIC codepage 1047 the value 127
-      is the double quote.
-    - fixed ':fixdel'
-
-5.6-390a:
-  first alpha release for OS/390 UNIX.
-
-  Addition:
-    - For the internal script language I added the feature "ebcdic".
-      This can be queried with the has()-function of the internal
-      script language.
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  vim:tw=78:fo=tcq2:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/os_amiga.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_amiga.txt*  For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_amiga.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -8,6 +8,8 @@
 This file contains the particularities for the Amiga version of Vim.
 There is also a section specifically for |MorphOS| below.
 
+NOTE: The Amiga code is still included, but has not been maintained or tested.
+
 Installation on the Amiga:
 - Assign "VIM:" to the directory where the Vim "doc" directory is.  Vim will
   look for the file "VIM:doc/help.txt" (for the help command).

runtime/doc/os_beos.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_beos.txt*	For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_beos.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -131,38 +131,9 @@ You may also use the /boot/bin/xtou command to convert UTF-8 files from (xtou
 
 5. The BeOS GUI						*beos-gui*
 
-Normally Vim starts with the GUI if you start it as gvim or vim -g.  The BeOS
-version tries to determine if it was started from the Tracker instead of the
-Terminal, and if so, use the GUI anyway.  However, the current detection scheme
-is fooled if you use the command "vim - </dev/null" or "vim filename &".  The
-latter can be called a feature but probably only works because there is no
-BSD-style job control.
-
-Stuff that does not work yet:
-
-- Running external commands from the GUI does not work 100% (again due to lack
-  of support for select()).  There was a choice between seeing the command's
-  output, or being able to interrupt it.  I chose for seeing the output.  Even
-  now the command sometimes crashes mysteriously, apparently in Be's
-  malloc_internal() called from the putenv() function, after fork()ing.  (data
-  access exception occurred, ec01b0ec:  90e80000 *stw r7, 0x0000 (r8)).  (:!ls
-  works usually, :r !ls usually doesn't).  This has been reported as bug
-  # 971215-083826.
-- The window title.
-- Starting the GUI from the Terminal version with :gui always acts as if
-  :gui -f were used.  There is no way to fix this that I can see.
-- There are some small display glitches here and there that I hope to clean up
-  later.  Most of them occur when the window is partially obscured.  Some of
-  them seem to be bugs in BeOS, because the Terminal has similar glitches.
-- Mouse up events are not generated when outside the window.  This is a bug in
-  BeOS.  You can notice this when selecting text and moving the cursor outside
-  the window, then letting go of the mouse button.  Another way is when you
-  drag the scrollbar and do the same thing.  Because Vim still thinks you are
-  still playing with the scrollbar it won't change it itself.  I provided a
-  workaround which kicks in when the window is activated or deactivated (so it
-  works best with focus- follows-mouse (/boot/bin/ffm) turned on).
-- The cursor does not flash (very low priority; I'm not sure I even like it
-  when it flashes)
+The BeOS GUI is no longer included.  It was not maintained for a while and
+most likely didn't work.  If you want to work on this: get the Vim 6.x version
+and merge it back in.
 
 
 6. The $VIM directory					*beos-vimdir*

runtime/doc/os_dos.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_dos.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2006 Mar 30
+*os_dos.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2006 Mar 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/os_mac.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_mac.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2006 Apr 30
+*os_mac.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2006 Apr 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar et al.

runtime/doc/os_mint.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_mint.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_mint.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Jens M. Felderhoff

runtime/doc/os_msdos.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_msdos.txt*  For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_msdos.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/os_os2.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_os2.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2007 Apr 22
+*os_os2.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2007 Apr 22
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Slootman
@@ -183,7 +183,8 @@ anyway you need an additional tool which gives you access to the clipboard
 from within a vio application.  The freeware package clipbrd.zip by Stefan
 Gruendel can be used for this purpose.  You might download the package
 including precompiled binaries and all sources from:
-	http://www.stellarcom.org/vim/index.html
+	http://www.os2site.com/sw/util/clipboard/index.html
+	http://download.uni-hd.de/ftp/pub/os2/pmtools/
 
 Installation of this package is straight forward: just put the two executables
 that come with this package into a directory within your PATH for Vim should
@@ -201,7 +202,7 @@ vim-manner and call: >
 
 which will write your selection right into OS/2's clipboard.
 
-For ease of use you might want to add some maps for this commands.  E.g. to
+For ease of use you might want to add some maps for these commands.  E.g. to
 use F11 to paste the clipboard into Vim and F12 to copy selected text to the
 clipboard you would use: >
 

runtime/doc/os_qnx.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_qnx.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_qnx.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Julian Kinraid

runtime/doc/os_risc.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_risc.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2008 Jun 28
+*os_risc.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Thomas Leonard
@@ -275,7 +275,6 @@ Downloading everything you need:
 
 - Get the latest source distribution (see www.vim.org)
 - Get the runtime environment files (e.g. these help files)
-- Get the "extra" archive (contains the RISC OS specific bits)
 - Get the RISC OS binary distribution (if possible)
 
 

runtime/doc/os_unix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_unix.txt*   For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
+*os_unix.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2005 Mar 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/os_vms.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.2.  Last change: 2009 Oct 28
+*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ specific source might contain CTAGS source files as described above.
 You can find more information about CTAGS on VMS at
 http://www.polarhome.com/ctags/
 
-Advanced users may try some acrobatics in FEATURE.H file also.
+Advanced users may try some acrobatics in FEATURE.H file as well.
 
 It is possible to compile with +xfontset +xim options too, but then you have
 to set up GUI fonts etc. correctly.  See :help xim from Vim command prompt.
@@ -639,7 +639,7 @@ You can now compare files in 4 ways: >
 
 DEC C uses many identifiers with '$' in them.  This is not allowed in ANSI C,
 and Vim recognises the '$' as the end of the identifier.  You can change this
-with the |iskeyword|command.
+with the 'iskeyword' option.
 Add this command to your .vimrc file: >
 
     autocmd FileType c,cpp,cs  set iskeyword+=$
@@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ slow when user wants to run Vim just in the console mode - because of X environm
 Luckily, there is a simple solution for that. Administrators need to deploy
 both GUI/GTK build and just console build executables, like below: >
 
-    |- vim72
+    |- vim73
     |----- doc
     |----- syntax        
        vimrc    (system rc files)
@@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ both GUI/GTK build and just console build executables, like below: >
 
 Define system symbols like below in for ex in LOGIN.COM or SYLOGIN.COM: >
 
-	$ define/nolog VIM RF10:[UTIL.VIM72] ! where you VIM directory is
+	$ define/nolog VIM RF10:[UTIL.VIM73] ! where you VIM directory is
 	$ vi*m  :== mcr VIM:VIM.EXE
 	$ gvi*m :== mcr VIM:GVIM.EXE
 	$ ! or you can try to spawn with
@@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Solution 2.  Different directories: >
 	$      define/nolog VIM RF10:[UTIL.IA64_EXE] ! IA64 executables
 	$ endif
         $! VIMRUNTIME must be defined in order to find runtime files
-	$ define/nolog VIMRUNTIME RF10:[UTIL.VIM72]
+	$ define/nolog VIMRUNTIME RF10:[UTIL.VIM73]
 
 A good example for this approach is the [GNU]gnu_tools.com script from
 GNU_TOOLS.ZIP package downloadable from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/
@@ -766,16 +766,20 @@ GNU_TOOLS.ZIP package downloadable from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/
 
 9. VMS related changes					*vms-changes*
 
-Recent changes
-- The following plugins are included into VMS runtime: 
-  genutils 2.4, multiselect 2.2, multvals 3.1, selectbuf 4.3,
-  bufexplorer 7.1.7, taglist 4.5
-- minor changes in vimrc (just in VMS runtime) 
+Version 7.3
+- CTAGS 5.8 included
+- VMS compile warnings fixed - floating-point overflow warning corrected on VAX
+- filepath completition corrected - too many chars were escaped in filename
+  and shell commands
+- the following plugins are included into VMS runtime:
+	genutils 2.4, multiselect 2.2, multvals 3.1, selectbuf 4.3,
+	bufexplorer 7.1.7, taglist 4.5
+- minor changes in vimrc (just in VMS runtime)
 - make_vms.mms - HUGE model is the default
 - [TESTDIR]make_vms.mms include as many tests possible
 - modify test30 and test54 for VMS
 - enable FLOAT feature in VMS port
-- os_vms.txt updated  
+- os_vms.txt updated
 
 Version 7.2 (2008 Aug 9)
 - VCF files write corrected